FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1051I 802.11g/DRAFT 802.11n WLAN+BLUETOOTH PCI-E MINICARD

OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM94313HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1051i; IC: 4324A-BRCM1051 Conditions on using BRCM regulatory approvals:

Customer must ensure that its product (the CUSTOMER Product) is electrically A. identical to Broadcoms reference designs. Customer acknowledges that any modifications to Broadcoms reference designs may invalidate regulatory approvals in relation to the CUSTOMER Product, or may necessitate notifications to the relevant regulatory authorities. Customer is responsible for ensuring that antennas used with the product are of B. the same type, with same or lower gains as approved and providing antenna reports to Broadcom. Customer is responsible for regression testing to accommodate changes to C. Broadcoms reference designs, new antennas, and portable RF exposure safety testing/approvals. Appropriate labels must be affixed to the CUSTOMER Product that comply with D. applicable regulations in all respects. E. product that contains the text as required by applicable law. Without limitation of the foregoing, an example (for illustration purposes only) of possible text to include is set forth below:

A users manual or instruction manual must be included with the customer 1. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. INFORMATION TO USER:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the Page 1 of 8 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM94313HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1051i; IC: 4324A-BRCM1051 user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. CAUTION: (this only applicable to 5GHz device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. System integrators must include the FCC ID on the end product. FCC Radio-Frequency Exposure & Approval Conditions:

1. Antennas must be installed in the display section of Netbook/notebook/laptop computer to provide at least 1.4cm separation distance from the transmitting antenna to the body of user during normal operating condition. 2. Transmitting antenna(s) can only be installed at the display section of computer. When this device is installed other than notebook computers, at least 20 cm separation distance shall be maintained between the transmitting antenna(s) to the body of user or nearby person. 3. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. 4. Only those antennas with same type and lesser gain filed under this FCC ID number can be used with this device. 5. The regulatory label on the final system must include the statement: Contains FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1051i and/or IC: 4324A-BRCM1051 or using electronic labeling method as documented in KDB 784748. 6. The final system integrator must ensure there is no instruction provided in the user manual or customer documentation indicating how to install or remove the transmitter Page 2 of 8 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM94313HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1051i; IC: 4324A-BRCM1051 module except such device has implemented two-ways authentication between module and the host system. 7. The final host manual shall include the following regulatory statement:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2. Canada - Industry Canada (IC) Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. Caution: (this only applicable to UNII device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for frequency Page 3 of 8 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM94313HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1051i; IC: 4324A-BRCM1051 range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RSS 102 RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. System integrators must include the IC ID on the end product. 3. Europe - EU Restrictions This equipment needs to be marked with the throughout the European community. 0984 symbol and can be used Marking by the symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. Information to be supplied to the users:

802.11a Restrictions:

- This product is for indoor use only when using channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, or 64 (5150 5350 MHz).

- DFS and TPC must remain enabled to ensure product compliance with EC regulations.

- To ensure compliance with local regulations, be sure to select the country in which the access point is installed.

- This product can be used as shown in the table below:

5 GHz wireless LAN IEEE 802.11a Indoor Use Only A, AND, B, CH, D, CY, CZ, DK, ES, EST, F, FIN, FL, FR, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, IS, L, LT, M, MC, N, NL, P, PL, RSM, S, SK, SLO, V Page 4 of 8 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM94313HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1051i; IC: 4324A-BRCM1051 Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Czech:

User's Manual in Czech language and a statement of conformity with Directive 1999/5/EC in Czech language must be enclosed to each product. France:

2.4GHz for Metropolitan France:

In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:

Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power (EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band Italy:

For private use, a general authorisation is required if WAS/RLANs are used outside own premises. For public use, a general authorisation is required Note for system integrators:

- The module is tested to comply with the requirement of the R&TTE Directive. System integrators are responsible for compliance of the final device with the R&TTE Directive.

- Packaging: CE Marking must also be on the outer packaging of the product. The outer packaging must also provide an indication as to where the device is intended to be used and OR conversely, where there may be restrictions for use. 4. Taiwan - NCC Statement to be included in the user guide Statement- For general products Page 5 of 8 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM94313HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1051i; IC: 4324A-BRCM1051 Additional Statement - For 5G Band products 5.25G ~5.35G Translation:

Article 12 Without permission, any company, firm or user shall not alter the frequency, increase the power, or change the characteristics and functions of the original design of the certified lower power frequency electric machinery. Article 14 The application of low power frequency electric machineries shall not affect the navigation safety nor interfere a legal communication, if an interference is found, the service will be suspended until improvement is made and the interference no longer exists. The foregoing legal communication refers to the wireless telecommunication operated according to the telecommunications laws and regulations. The low power frequency electric machinery should be able to tolerate the interference of the electric wave radiation electric machineries and equipments for legal communications or industrial and scientific applications. Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Appendix:

(ID):

CCXXxxLPyyyZz

,, CCXXxxLPyyyZz . 5. Korea Include the following statement either on the label or in the User Guide. Page 6 of 8 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM94313HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1051i; IC: 4324A-BRCM1051

6. Argentina The current approval is in the name of Broadcoms local representative. It may be necessary to obtain regulatory approval in the name of the local distributor or importer. We suggest manufacturers check with their local distributors and importers in Argentina. 7. Brazil - Anatel Before using Broadcom Anatel approvals, 1. PC- OEM must make arrangement for its local offices or distributors to provide maintenance, technical assistance or replace any faulty products sold in Brazil. 2. All warranty services will be provided by the distributors or PC-OEM sales support in Brazil. An official agreement stating warranty responsibilities must be signed and made available to Broadcom. Interference statement to be included in the Users Guide

"Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio."

Translation:

"This equipment operates in secondary character. It can be affected by harmful interference. However, it cannot cause interference to systems operating in primary character."

8. South Africa ICASA PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to supply spare parts and carry out repairs in South Africa. 9. Indonesia - POSTEL PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to provide product warranty and after sales services. 10. Japan MIC Page 7 of 8 OEM Installation Guidance Document For BRCM WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM94313HMGB FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1051i; IC: 4324A-BRCM1051 Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Page 8 of 8

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 20082011 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. ENERGY STAR is a registered mark owned by the U.S. government. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: February 2011 Document Part Number: 653267-001 Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices .......................................................................................................................................... 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ...................................................................................... 2 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ..... 3 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................. 3 Brazil notice .......................................................................................................................................... 4 Canada notices .................................................................................................................................... 4 Avis Canadien ...................................................................................................................................... 4 European Union Regulatory notices ..................................................................................................... 4 Products with HP Mobile Broadband Modules .................................................................... 5 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................... 6 Germany ............................................................................................................. 6 Japan notices ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11g devices ............................................................................................ 7 Bluetooth devices ................................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................... 8 South Korea notice ............................................................................................................................... 8 Mexico notice ....................................................................................................................................... 8 Singapore wireless notice .................................................................................................................... 8 Thailand WWAN wireless notice .......................................................................................................... 8 Taiwan notices ..................................................................................................................................... 9 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ............................................................................................ 9 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 9 Vietnam Compliance Marking Notice ................................................................................................... 9 Airline travel notice ............................................................................................................................. 10 Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 10 ENERGY STAR compliance .............................................................................................................. 10 Laser compliance ............................................................................................................................... 11 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 11 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 11 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 12 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................. 12 Canada modem statements ............................................................................................... 15 Japan modem statements ................................................................................................. 15 iii New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 15 Voice support .................................................................................................... 16 Power cord notice ............................................................................................................................... 16 Japan power cord notice .................................................................................................... 16 DC plug of external HP power supply ................................................................................ 16 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................... 16 2 Safety notices ................................................................................................................................................ 17 Heat-related safety warning notice ..................................................................................................... 17 Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................... 17 Battery notices .................................................................................................................................... 17 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................... 17 Power cord notices ............................................................................................................................. 18 Cleaning the keyboard ....................................................................................................................... 18 Travel notice ....................................................................................................................................... 18 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................... 18 3 Environmental notices ................................................................................................................................. 19 Electronic hardware and battery recycling ......................................................................................... 19 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ....................... 19 Chemical substances ......................................................................................................................... 19 China material content declarations ................................................................................................... 20 Japan material content declaration .................................................................................................... 22 Turkey EEE regulation ....................................................................................................................... 22 Ukraine Restriction of Hazardous Substances ................................................................................... 23 United States mercury disposal .......................................................................................................... 23 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................ 23 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 24 iv 1 Regulatory notices Select Start > My Computer. If the left pane, select View System Information > Hardware tab > Device Manager. This guide provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply on-board airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device, choose the procedure below that corresponds to the operating system running on your computer. For Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Home, follow these steps:

1. 2. For Windows Vista, follow these steps:

1. 2. For later Windows operating systems, such as Windows 7, follow these steps:

Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Device Manager. For non-Windows operating systems, follow the instructions provided by your operating system to identify a hardware device such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device. Regulatory markings for your country or region may be located on the bottom of the product, either under the battery, under a user-removable door (or some other user-accessible location), or on the wireless or modem module. To view the FCC IDs for any radio modules in your notebook (Bluetooth, WLAN, or WWAN), follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the "Press the ESC key for Startup Menu" message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. Select the System Configuration menu. 2. 3. The FCC IDs are displayed at the bottom of the screen. CAUTION: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not have an FCC ID. 1 Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 12 inches: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides. To access the user guides, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 12 inches: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides. To access the user guides, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Canada notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union Regulatory notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 2004/108/EC Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC where applicable CE compliance of this product is valid if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has wired and/or wireless telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of EU Directive R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC. Compliance with these directives implies conformity to applicable harmonized European standards

(European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family and available (in English only) either within the product documentation or at the following Web site: www.hp.eu/certificates (type the product number in the search box). The compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product:

4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices For non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth, within power class below 10 mW. For EU non-harmonized telecommunications products (if applicable, a 4-digit notified body number is inserted between CE and ! (the exclamation mark). Please refer to the regulatory label provided on the product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. The telephone connector (not available for all products) is intended for connection to analog telephone networks. NOTE: For products with wireless LAN devices, some countries may have specific obligations or special requirements about the operation of wireless LAN networks such as indoor use only or restrictions of the channels available. Be sure that the country settings of the wireless network are correct. In France, certain restrictions apply for the 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product. This product may be used indoors for the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 to 13). For outdoor use, only the 2400-MHz to 2454-MHz frequency band (channels 1 to 7) may be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.arcep.fr. The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS: HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, GERMANY. Products with HP Mobile Broadband Modules THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO FREQUENCY RADIATION. The HP Mobile Broadband Module in your notebook is a radio transmitter and receiver. The device is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines that establish permitted levels of RF radiation for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The device also meets the European R&TTE directives, including the protection of the health and the safety of the user and any other person. The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR).* The SAR was obtained by testing the device at standard operating positions European Union Regulatory notices 5 with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value, because the device operates at multiple power levels and uses only the power required to reach the network. When installed in the notebook computer, this device meets RF exposure guidelines when the antennas are positioned at a minimum distance from the body. In order to transmit data or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data or messages may be delayed until such a connection becomes available. Be sure that the recommended distance is observed until the transmission is complete.

*The non-FCC, international guidelines state that the SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. Ergonomics notice Germany Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the ergonomic requirements and are suitable only for short-time use of VDU tasks. When a mobile computer is used for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit (VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000:2008 This device is intended for use at visual display workplaces in compliance with BildscharbV, only with external keyboard and adequate external monitor. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sun light) reflections may occur which result in reduced readability. Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000:2008 Das Gert ist fr die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gem BildscharbV nur mit externer Tastatur und geeignetem Monitor vorgesehen. Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Japan notices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Wireless LAN 802.11g devices Bluetooth devices Japan notices 7 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. South Korea notice Mexico notice La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) este equipo puede que no cause interferencia y (2) este equipo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo interferencia que pueda ser causada por la operacin no deseada. Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Thailand WWAN wireless notice This telecom equipment has complied with NTC regulations. 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Taiwan notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Vietnam Compliance Marking Notice This marking is for applicable products only. Taiwan notices 9 Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Battery notices WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. For information about removing a battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. ENERGY STAR compliance As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has followed the EPAs enhanced product qualification and certification process to ensure that the products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR qualified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-qualified computers:

The ENERGY STAR program for computers was created by the EPA to promote energy efficiency and reduce air pollution through more energy-efficient equipment in homes, offices, and factories. One way that products achieve this goal is by using the Microsoft Windows power management feature to reduce power consumption when the product is not in use. The power management feature allows the computer to initiate a low-power or Sleep mode after a period of user inactivity. When used with an external ENERGY STAR qualified monitor, this feature also supports similar power management features of the monitor. To take advantage of these potential energy savings, the power management feature has been preset to behave in the following ways when the system is operating on AC power:

Turn off the display after 15 minutes Initiate Sleep after 30 minutes The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site at http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site at http://www.energystar.gov. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007. Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. Laser compliance 11 U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Modem notices 13 14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. b. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). d. Modem notices 15 Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japan power cord notice DC plug of external HP power supply NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. NOTE: The computer operating voltage and current can be found on the system regulatory label. Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. 16 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices 2 Safety notices Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). Potential safety conditions notice If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer: crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. Battery notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING! Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. If the computer includes a headset or earphones, this combination is in compliance to EN 50332-1. Heat-related safety warning notice 17 Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Cleaning the keyboard WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system. 18 Chapter 2 Safety notices 3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Electronic hardware and battery recycling 19 China material content declarations The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Part Name Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 20 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external TV tuner USB flash memory drive USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Union's RoHS Legislation Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment and its amendments. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity. China material content declarations 21 Japan material content declaration A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide material content declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Turkey EEE regulation In Conformity with the EEE regulation EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur 22 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Ukraine Restriction of Hazardous Substances The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

, 3 2008 1057. United States mercury disposal This HP product contains the following materials that might require special handling at end-of-life:

Mercury in the fluorescent lamp in the display LCD Disposal of mercury can be regulated because of environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) http://www.eiae.org. NOTE: Notebook computers configured with LED backlights do not contain mercury lamps. Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. Ukraine Restriction of Hazardous Substances 23 Index A airline travel notice 10 B battery notice 10, 17, 23 battery recycling 19 Brazil notice 4 C cable grounding notice 18 Canada modem statement 15 Canada notices 4 Canadian French notices 4 China Material Content Declarations 20 D DC plug of external HP power supply notice 16 Declaration of Conformity 3 disposal notices battery 10, 23 equipment 19 mercury 23 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 19 ENERGY STAR compliance 10 environmental notices 19 equipment disposal notice 19 ergonomics notice 6 European Union notices 4 F Federal Communications Commission cables 2 modifications 2 notice 2 G GS Notice 6 24 Index H hardware device, identifying 1 headset and earphone volume level notice 17 J Japan material content declaration 22 Japan modem statement 15 Japan notice 7 Japan power cord notice 16 K keyboard notice 18 L laser safety notice 11 M Macrovision Corporation notice 16 mercury disposal notice 23 Mexico wireless notice 8 modem notices 11 modem statements Canada 15 Japan 15 New Zealand 15 U.S. 12 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 2 N New Zealand modem statement 15 notices airline travel 10 battery 10, 17, 23 Brazil 4 Canada 4 Canadian French 4 DC plug of external HP power supply 16 environmental 19 equipment disposal 19 ergonomics 6 European Union 4 Federal Communications Commission 2 headset and earphone volume level 17 Japan 7 Japan power cord 16 keyboard 18 laser safety 11 Macrovision Corporation 16 mercury disposal 23 Mexico 8 modem 11 perchlorate material 23 power cords 16, 18 Singapore 8 South Korea 8 Taiwan 9 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 8 travel 18 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances 23 Vietnam compliance marking 9 P power cord notice 16, 18 R recycling, electronic hardware and battery 19 S Singapore wireless notice 8 South Korea notice 8 T Taiwan notice 9 Thailand WWAN wireless notice travel notice 18 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 8 18 U U.S. modem statement 12 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances notice 23 V Vietnam compliance marking notice 9 voice support 16 volume level notice, headset and earphone 17 W wireless LAN devices 3 Index 25

Lenovo IdeaPad Z380/Z480/Z485/

Z580/Z585 User Guide V1.0 Read the safety notices and important tips in the included manuals before using your computer. Notes Before using the product, be sure to read Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide first. Some instructions in this guide may assume that you are using Windows 7. If you are using other Windows operating system, some operations may be slightly different. If you are using other operating systems, some operations may not apply to you. The features described in this guide are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer and/or your computer may include features that are not described in this user guide. The illustrations used in this manual are for Lenovo IdeaPad Z380 unless otherwise stated. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the product you are using. Regulatory Notice To refer to it, go to http://consumersupport.lenovo.com/ and click User guides and manuals. First Edition (December 2011) Copyright Lenovo 2011. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Contents Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer.......................... 1 Top view..........................................1 Left-side view .................................4 Right-side view...............................5 Front view .......................................6 Bottom view ....................................7 Chapter 2. Learning the basics........................................ 8 First use............................................8 Using AC adapter and battery ..... 10 Using the touchpad......................12 Using the keyboard......................13 Connecting external devices.......16 Special keys and buttons.............19 System status indicators..............23 Securing your computer..............24 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet.................................... 26 Wired connection .........................26 Wireless connection .....................28 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system..................................... 30 OneKey Rescue system ...............30 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting ....33 Frequently asked questions ........33 Troubleshooting ...........................35 Appendix A. CRU instructions ............................ 40 Replacing the battery pack..........40 Replacing the hard disk drive ....41 Replacing memory .......................45 Removing the optical drive ........48 Trademarks............................. 50 i Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Top view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Lenovo IdeaPad Z380/Z480/Z485 h a b c d fe i j g 1 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer

Lenovo IdeaPad Z580/Z585 h a b c d fe i j g Attention:

Do NOT open the display panel beyond 130 degrees. When closing the display panel, be careful NOT to leave pens or any other objects in between the display panel and the keyboard. Otherwise, the display panel may be damaged.

2 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Integrated camera Use the camera for video communication. Wireless module antennas The built-in antennas ensure optimal reception of wireless radio. Computer display The computer display with LED backlight provides a b c d Speakers brilliant visual output. The stereo speakers provide rich and powerful sound. e f g h i Power button Press this button to turn on the computer. OneKey Rescue system button Press this button to start OneKey Rescue system when the computer is powered off. Note: For details, see OneKey Rescue system on page 30. System status indicators Cap sensor buttons Built-in microphone For details, see System status indicators on page 23. For details, see Cap Sensor buttons on page 20. The built-in microphone (with noise reduction) can be used for video conferencing, voice narration, or simple audio recordings. j Touchpad The touchpad functions as a conventional mouse. Note: For details, see Using the touchpad on page 12. 3 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Left-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a b c d e f a Kensington slot Attach a security lock (not supplied) here. Note: For details, see Attaching a security lock (not supplied) on page 24. b Fan louvers Dissipate internal heat. Note: Make sure that none of the fan louvers are blocked or else overheating of the computer may occur. VGA port Connects to external display devices. RJ-45 port This port connects the computer to an Ethernet network. Note: For details, see Wired connection on page 26. c d e HDMI port Connects to devices with HDMI input such as a TV or a display. f USB port Connects to USB devices. Note: For details, see Connecting USB devices on page 17. 4 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Right-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Lenovo IdeaPad Z380 ba c d e

Lenovo IdeaPad Z480/Z485/Z580/Z585 ba d c d e a Headphone jack Connects to external headphones.

Attention:

Listening to music at high volume over extended periods of time may damage your hearing. b Microphone jack Connects to external microphones. c d Optical drive Reads/Burns optical discs. USB port Connects to USB devices. Note: For details, see Connecting USB devices on page 17. e AC power adapter jack Connect the AC adapter here. Note: For details, see Using AC adapter and battery on page 10. 5 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Front view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a Memory card slot Insert memory cards (not supplied) here. Note: For details, see Using memory cards (not supplied) on page 16.

6 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Bottom view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a Battery latch -

manual b Battery pack The manual battery latch is used to keep the battery pack secured in place. For details, see Using AC adapter and battery on page 10. c Hard disk drive /

Memory / Central processing unit /

Mini PCI Express Card slot compartment d Battery latch -

spring loaded The spring-loaded battery latch keeps the battery pack secured in place. 7 Chapter 2. Learning the basics First use - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Reading the manuals Read the supplied manuals before using your computer.

Connecting to the power The supplied battery pack is not fully charged at purchase. To charge the battery and begin using your computer, insert the battery pack and connect the computer to an electrical outlet. The battery is automatically charged while the computer is running on AC power. Installing the battery pack Refer to the supplied Setup Poster to install the battery pack. Connecting the computer to an electrical outlet 1 Connect the power cord to the AC adapter. 2 Connect the AC adapter to the AC power adapter jack of the computer firmly. 3 Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet.

Turning on the computer Press the power button to turn on the computer.

Configuring the operating system You may need to configure the operating system when it is first used. The configuration process may include the procedures below. Accepting the end user license agreement Configuring the Internet connection Registering the operating system Creating a user account 8 Chapter 2. Learning the basics

Putting your computer into sleep state or shutting it down When you finish working with your computer, you can put it into sleep state or shut it down. Putting your computer into sleep state If you will be away from your computer for only a short time, put the computer into sleep state. When the computer is in sleep state, you can quickly wake it to resume use, and bypass the startup process. To put the computer into sleep state, do one of the following. Click Press Fn + F1. and select Sleep from the Start menu. Note: Wait until the power indicator light starts blinking (indicating that the computer is in sleep state) before you move your computer. Moving your computer while the hard disk is spinning can damage the hard disk, causing loss of data. To wake the computer, do one of the following. Press the power button. Press any key on the keyboard.

Shutting down your computer If you are not going to use your computer for a day or two, shut it down. To shut down your computer, click menu. and select Shut down from the Start 9 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using AC adapter and battery - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Checking battery status You can determine the percentage of battery power remaining by checking the battery icon in the notification area. Note: As each computer user has different habits and needs, it is difficult to predict how long a battery charge will last. There are two main factors:

The amount of energy stored in the battery when you commence work. The way you use your computer: for example, how often you access the hard disk drive and how bright you make the computer display.

Charging the battery When you find that the battery power is low, you need to charge the battery or replace it with a fully charged one. You need to charge the battery in any of the following situations:

When you purchase a new battery If the battery status indicator starts blinking If the battery has not been used for a long time Notes:

You are advised to insert the battery pack when using your computer to prevent small particles from entering the inside of your computer.

To increase the life of the battery pack, the computer does not start recharging the battery immediately after it drops from fully charged.

Charge the battery at a temperature between 50 F and 86 F (10 C-30 C).

Full charge or discharge is not required. 10 Chapter 2. Learning the basics

Removing the battery pack If you are not going to use the computer for an extended period of time, or if you need to send your computer to Lenovo for service, etc. remove the battery pack from the computer. Before removing the battery pack, make sure the computer has been shut down.

Handling the battery If the rechargeable battery pack is replaced with an incorrect type, there may be danger of an explosion. The battery pack contains a small amount of harmful substances. To avoid possible injury and detriment to the environment, pay attention to the following points:

Replace only with a battery of the type recommended by Lenovo. Keep the battery pack away from fire. Do not expose the battery pack to water or rain. Do not attempt to disassemble the battery pack. Do not short-circuit the battery pack. Keep the battery pack away from children. Do not put the battery pack in trash that is disposed of in landfills. When disposing of the battery, comply with local ordinances or regulations and your companys safety standards. 11 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using the touchpad - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a b a Touchpad b Touchpad button To move the cursor on the screen, slide your fingertip over the pad in the direction in which you want the cursor to move. The function of the left/right side corresponds to that of the left/right mouse button on a conventional mouse. Note: You can enable/disable the touchpad using Fn + F6. When the touchpad indicator is lit, the touchpad is disabled. 12 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using the keyboard - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Your computer has a numeric keypad and function keys incorporated in its standard keyboard.

Numeric keypad Lenovo IdeaPad Z380/Z480/Z485 The keyboard has keys that, when enabled, work as a 10-key numeric keypad. To enable or disable the numeric keypad, press Fn + F8. Lenovo IdeaPad Z580/Z585 The keyboard has a separate numeric keypad. To enable or disable the numeric keypad, press the Num Lock key. 13 Chapter 2. Learning the basics

Function key combinations Through the use of the function keys, you can change operational features instantly. To use this function, press and hold Fn

; then press one of the function keys a

. b b b a 14 The following describes the features of each function key. Fn + Esc:

Chapter 2. Learning the basics Turn on/off the integrated camera. Enter sleep mode. Turn on/off the backlight of the LCD screen. Open the interface for the display device switch to select this notebook or an external display. Open the interface for display resolution settings. Open the interface for integrated wireless devices settings (On/Off). Enable/Disable the touchpad. Fn + F1:

Fn + F2:

Fn + F3:

Fn + F4:

Fn + F5:

Fn + F6:

Fn + F8 (Lenovo IdeaPad Z380/Z480/Z485):

Enable/Disable the numeric keypad. Fn + F9:

Fn + F10:

Fn + F11:

Fn + F12:

Start/Pause playback of Windows Media Player. Stop playback of Windows Media Player. Skip to the previous track. Skip to the next track. Fn + Insert (Lenovo IdeaPad Z580/Z585):

Fn + PgUp

(Lenovo IdeaPad Z380/

Z480/Z485):

Enable/Disable the scroll lock. Fn + PrtSc:

Fn + Home:

Fn + End:

Activate the system request. Activate the pause function. Activate the break function. Fn + PgDn (Lenovo IdeaPad Z380/Z480/Z485):

Activate the insert function. Fn + / :

Fn + / :

Increase/Decrease display brightness. Increase/Decrease sound volume. 15 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Connecting external devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Your computer has a wide range of built-in features and connection capabilities.

Using memory cards (not supplied) Your computer supports the following types of memory cards:

Secure Digital (SD) card MultiMediaCard (MMC) Secure Digital PRO (SD PRO) (Lenovo IdeaPad Z580/Z585) Memory Stick (MS) (Lenovo IdeaPad Z380/Z480/Z485) Memory Stick PRO (MS PRO) xD-Picture (xD) card Notes:

This card reader does not support SDIO devices (e.g., SDIO Bluetooth, etc.). Insert ONLY one card in the slot at a time. Inserting a memory card 1 Push the dummy card until you hear a click. Gently pull the dummy card out of the memory card slot. Note: The dummy card is used for preventing dust and small particles from entering the inside of your computer when the memory card slot is not in use. Retain the dummy card for future use. 2 Slide the memory card in until it clicks into place. Removing a memory card 1 Push the memory card until you hear a click. 2 Gently pull the memory card out of the memory card slot. Note: Before removing the memory card, disable it via Windows safely remove hardware and eject media utility to avoid data corruption. 16 Chapter 2. Learning the basics

Connecting USB devices Your computer comes with 3 or 4 USB ports compatible with USB devices. The first time you plug a USB device into a particular USB port on your computer, Windows automatically installs a driver for that device. After the driver is installed, you can disconnect and reconnect the device without performing any additional steps. Note: Typically, Windows detects a new device after connecting it, and then installs the driver automatically. However, some devices may require you to install the driver before connecting. Check the documentation provided by the devices manufacturer before connecting the device. Before disconnecting a USB storage device, make sure your computer has finished transferring data by that device. Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area of Windows to remove the device before disconnecting. Note: If your USB device uses a power cord, connect the device to a power source before connecting it. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized. 17 Chapter 2. Learning the basics

Connecting Bluetooth enabled devices (on select models) If your computer has an integrated Bluetooth adapter card, it can connect to and transfer data wirelessly with other Bluetooth enabled devices, such as notebook computers, PDAs and cell phones. You can transfer data between these devices without cables and up to 10 meters range in open space. Note: The actual maximum range may vary due to interference and transmission barriers. To get the best possible connection speed, place the device as near your computer as possible. Enabling Bluetooth communications on your computer 1 Press Fn + F5 to make configuration. Notes:

When you do not need to use the Bluetooth function, turn it off to save battery power.

You need to pair the Bluetooth enabled device with your computer before you can transfer data between them. Read the documentation supplied with the Bluetooth enabled device for details on how to pair the device with your computer. 18 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Special keys and buttons - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a b c d e f

OneKey Rescue system button a When the computer is powered-off, press this button to start Lenovo OneKey Rescue system. In Windows operating system, press this button to start Lenovo OneKey Recovery system. Note: For details, see OneKey Rescue system on page 30. 19 Chapter 2. Learning the basics

Cap Sensor buttons b f

Volume buttons b d

b c d Mute/Unmute Volume down Volume up e OneKey Theater button Lenovo OneKey Theater provides five scenario modes for using your computer in different ways: normal mode, movie mode, music mode, picture mode, and intelligent mode. These modes are preset enhancements by Lenovo to improve visual and aural experiences via your computer in different usage scenarios. You can manually choose between normal, movie and intelligent mode. Picture or music mode is automatically selected if your computer is in intelligent mode. To manually select a desired mode:

Press and release the OneKey Theater button to display the on-screen menu. Keep pressing and releasing the button until the icon of your desired mode is highlighted. The computer switches to the selected mode after 2 seconds. Normal mode The default mode. Movie mode Provides enhanced visual and audio output. Music mode Provides enhanced audio output. Picture mode Provides enhanced contrast and color saturation. 20 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Intelligent mode Automatically switch your computer between movie, music, and picture mode according to the program that is running. Notes:

You can enable or disable the OneKey Theater feature via the Start menu.

Some programs may not be compatible with intelligent mode. f Thermal management button The thermal management button can be used to switch the computer between different work modes and thus control the speed at which the heat dissipation fan spins. You can choose between standard, super silent, or efficient thermal dissipation mode. You can also activate the dust cleaning feature by pressing and releasing the thermal control button. Standard mode Standard mode is the factory default mode. It is the recommended work mode for most programs. Super silent mode If your computer is not running large programs and you want a silent work environment, switch your computer to super silent mode. To switch to super silent mode, repeatedly press the thermal management button until highlighted. The computer will switch to super silent mode after three seconds. is Note: The heat dissipation fan spins at relatively low speeds in super silent mode, and thus dissipates less heat than in other modes. If large programs are running, the system may lower the voltage of the CPU (central processing unit) automatically to decrease the heat produced by the CPU. Consequently, you might experience lower system performance when the computer is running in super silent mode. Efficient thermal dissipation mode If large programs are running, switch your computer to efficient thermal dissipation mode to allow more efficient thermal dissipation. To switch to efficient thermal dissipation mode, repeatedly press the thermal management button until is highlighted. 21 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Performing dust cleaning Dust tends to accumulate around the heat sink of the computers CPU over time, reducing the dissipation capability of the heat sink. You can reduce the amount of accumulated dust by performing dust cleaning. To perform dust cleaning, repeatedly press the thermal management button until highlighted. Dust cleaning will start after three seconds. When dust cleaning is activated, the heat dissipation fan spins at high and low speed alternatively to allow dust to be discharged. A complete dust cleaning process takes several minutes to complete. You can cancel the process at any time by switching the computer to standard, super silent or efficient thermal dissipation mode. Upon completion, the computer returns to the previous mode when dust cleaning was activated. is Note: We recommend you perform dust cleaning at least once a month to reduce the amount of dust accumulation around the heat sink. Place your computer in a clean environment with good ventilation when performing dust cleaning. 22 Chapter 2. Learning the basics System status indicators - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

These indicators inform you of the computer status. a b c a b c Power status indicator Battery status indicator Caps lock indicator 23 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Securing your computer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

This section provides information about how to help protect your computer from theft and unauthorized use.

Attaching a security lock (not supplied) You can attach a security lock to your computer to help prevent it from being removed without your permission. For details on installing the security lock, please refer to the instructions shipped with the security lock that you have purchased. Refer to the Left-side view on page 4 for the location of the Kensington slot. Notes:

Before purchasing any security product, verify that it is compatible with this type of security keyhole.

You are responsible for evaluating, selecting, and implementing the locking devices and security features. Lenovo offers no comment judgement or warranty regarding the function, quality or performance of locking devices and security features.

Using VeriFace VeriFace is a face recognition software which takes a digital snapshot, extracts key features of your face, and creates a digital map that becomes the systems password. If you want to activate VeriFace for the first time, click the VeriFace icon on the desktop to register your facial image. Notes:

The face registration and verification works best in an environment with steady and even light.

You can determine whether to use this function when you log on the system. For more details on VeriFace, see the software help. 24 Chapter 2. Learning the basics

Using passwords Using passwords helps prevent your computer from being used by others. Once you set a password and enable it, a prompt appears on the screen each time you power on the computer. Enter your password at the prompt. The computer cannot be used unless you enter the correct password. Note: This password can be from one to seven alphanumeric characters in any combination. For details about how to set the password, see the Help to the right of the screen in BIOS setup utility. Note: To enter BIOS setup utility, press F2 when the Lenovo logo appears on the screen while the computer is starting up. 25 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet As a global network, the Internet connects computers worldwide, providing services such as e-mailing, information searching, electronic commerce, Web browsing and entertainment. You can connect the computer to the Internet in the following ways:

Wired connection: use physical wiring to connect. Wireless network technology: connect without wiring. Wired connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Wired connections are a reliable and safe way to connect the computer to the Internet. Cable Cable Internet services use a cable modem connected to the residential cable TV line. DSL is a family of related technologies that bring high-

speed network access to homes and small businesses over ordinary telephone lines. DSL 26 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet

Hardware connection:

Cable DSL TV cable Telephone line Splitter *

Splitter *

Cable modem *

DSL modem *

* Not supplied. Note: The above diagrams are for reference only. Actual connection method may vary.

Software configuration Consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) for details on how to configure your computer. 27 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet Wireless connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Wireless connections provide mobile access to the Internet, allowing you to stay online anywhere the wireless signal covers. Divided by the signal scales, wireless connection to the Internet can be built based on the following standards. Wi-Fi WiMAX Wi-Fi networks cover a small physical area, like a home, office, or small group of buildings. An access point is necessary for the connection. WiMAX networks connect several Wireless LAN systems to cover a metropolitan area, providing high-

speed broadband access without the need for cables. Note: Your computer may not support all wireless connection methods. 28 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet

Using Wi-Fi/WiMAX (on select models) Enabling wireless connection To enable wireless communications, do the following:

1 Press Fn + F5 to make configuration. Hardware connection Wi-Fi/WiMAX network

* Not supplied Access point *

Software configuration Consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) and search Windows Help and Support Center for details on how to configure your computer. 29 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system OneKey Rescue system - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Introduction The Lenovo OneKey Rescue system is an easy-to-use program that can be used to back up the data on your system partition (C drive) for easy restore when required. You can run Lenovo OneKey Recovery under the Windows operating system, and the OneKey Rescue system without starting the Windows operating system. Attention:

In order to utilize the features of the OneKey Rescue system, your hard disk already includes a hidden partition by default to store the system image file and OneKey Rescue system program files. This default partition is hidden for security reasons and is the reason the available disk space is less than it claims. The exact available hard disk space depends on the file size of the mirror image file (based on the size of operating system and preinstalled software).

Using Lenovo OneKey Recovery (within Windows operating system) In Windows operating system, double click the OneKey Recovery system Icon on the desktop to launch Lenovo OneKey Recovery. Within the program, you can back up the system partition on the hard disk drive, other storage devices, or by creating recovery discs. Notes:

The backup process and creation of recovery discs may take some time, connect the AC adapter and battery pack to your computer.

After the recovery discs are burned, please number them so that you can use them in the correct order.

Computers without an integrated optical drive support the creation of recovery discs;

however an appropriate external optical drive is needed to physically create the recovery discs. For more instructions, see the Help file of Lenovo OneKey Recov-

ery. 30 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system

Using Lenovo OneKey Rescue system (without Windows operating system) In the event that the operating system cannot be loaded, follow the steps below to access OneKey Rescue system. Shut down your computer. Press the key to launch OneKey Rescue system. Within the program, you can choose to restore your system partition to the original factory status, or to a previously generated backup. Note: The recovery process is irreversible. Make sure to back up any critical data before using the recovery feature.

Creating a recovery disc(s) Your computer does not ship with a recovery disc. You can use Lenovo OneKey Recovery system to create a recovery disc(s), which can be used to start and restore your computer in case of a system failure. To create a recovery disc(s):

Insert a recordable disc into the optical drive on your computer. Note: If your computer does not come with an integrated optical drive or if the integrated optical drive does not support disc creating, connect an appropriate external optical drive to your computer. In Windows, press the OneKey Rescue system button to launch Lenovo OneKey Recovery system. On the main screen, click Create Recovery Disc. Choose the type of recovery disc(s). You can create three types of recovery disc(s): recovery disc(s) with existing backup image, recovery disc(s) from the current system partition, and factory default recovery disc(s). Select the type of recovery disc you want to create and follow the on-screen instructions. Insert additional recordable disc(s) when prompted. 31 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system Notes:

The estimated number of discs needed will be displayed before the process of creating the recovery disc(s) begins. To minimize the number of discs needed, use recordable DVDs as the media. Also make sure your optical drive is compatible with the disc intended for use.

After recovery disc creation, number the discs appropriately for use in their correct order. The first disc created will be used to start the computer in the case of a system failure. 32 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Frequently asked questions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

This section lists frequently asked questions and tells where you can find detailed answers. What safety precautions should I follow when using my computer?

See Chapter 1. Important safety information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. How can I prevent problems with my computer?

See Chapter 2. Use and care Information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. What are the main hardware features of my computer?

More information can be found in Chapter 1 and 2. Where can I find the detailed specifications for my computer?

See http://consumersupport.lenovo.com. I need to upgrade a device or I need to replace one of the following: the hard disk drive, memory, or the keyboard. See Appendix A. CRU instructions on page 40 of this guide. Where are the recovery discs?

Your computer did not come with a recovery disc. For an explanation of the alternative recovery methods offered by Lenovo, see Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system on page 30. Where are the installation discs for preinstalled programs?

Installation discs for preinstalled programs are not supplied with Windows preinstalled computers. You can visit the Lenovo consumer support Web site to find all preinstalled software downloads. By default, you can find some installation backups for certain preinstalled software in the APP folder under the D driver. How can I contact the customer support center?

See " Chapter 3. Getting help and service" of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. 33 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Where can I find warranty information?

For the warranty applicable to your computer, including the warranty period and type of warranty service, see the Lenovo limited warranty flyer that came with your computer. How can I install the device drivers?

A compatible device driver is a requirement to ensure correct operation and performance of each component in your computer. If your computer is pre-installed with an operating system, Lenovo provides all drivers that you need in your hard disk. What can I do if the backup process fails?

If you can start the backup feature without a problem, but it fails during the backup process, please try the following steps:

1 Close other programs, then restart the backup process. 2 Check if the destination media is damaged, try to select another path and then try again. When do I need to restore the system to the factory status?

You can use this feature when your system fails or you need to re-install your operating system. This will restore your computer back to the initial status when you first booted up your computer after receiving it from the store. If there is critical data on your current partition, back it up before you run this recovery feature. 34 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

If you do not find your problem here, see Chapter 2. The following section only describes problems that might negate the need to refer to the more comprehensive information in Chapter 2. Display problems When I turn on the computer, nothing appears on the screen. When I turn on the computer, only a white cursor appears on a blank screen. My screen goes blank while the computer is on.

If the screen is blank, make sure that:

- The battery is installed correctly.

- The AC adapter is connected to the computer and the power cord is plugged into a working electrical outlet.

- The computer power is on. (Press the power button again for confirmation.)

- The memory is installed correctly. If these items are properly set, and the screen remains blank, have the computer serviced.

Restore backed-up files to your Windows environment or the entire contents of your hard disk to the original factory contents using OneKey Rescue system. If you still see only the cursor on the screen, have the computer serviced.

Your screen saver or power management may be enabled. Do one of the following to exit from the screen saver or to resume from sleep or hibernation mode:

- Touch the touchpad.

- Press any key on the keyboard.

- Press the power button.

- Press Fn + F2 to confirm whether the backlight for the LCD screen has been turned off. 35 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Password problems I forgot my password. Keyboard problems A number appears when you enter a letter (Lenovo IdeaPad Z380/Z480/Z485).

If you forget your user password, you must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the password changed. If you forget your HDD password, a Lenovo authorized servicer cannot reset your password or recover data from the hard disk. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the hard disk drive replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service. If you forget your supervisor password, a Lenovo authorized servicer cannot reset your password. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the system board replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service.

The numeric lock function is on. To disable it, press Fn + F8. Sleep or hibernation problems The critical low-battery error message appears, and the computer immediately turns off.

The battery power is getting low. Connect the AC adapter to the computer, or replace the battery with a fully charged one. The computer enters sleep mode immediately after Power-

on self-test (POST).

Make sure that:

- The battery is charged.

- The operating temperature is within the acceptable range. See Chapter 2. Use and care Information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. Note:If the battery is charged and the temperature is within range, have the computer serviced. 36 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting The computer does not return from sleep mode and the com-

puter does not work.

If the computer does not return from sleep mode, it may have entered hibernation mode automatically because the battery is depleted. Check the power indicator. If your computer is in sleep mode, connect the AC adapter to the computer, then press any key or the power button. If your computer is in hibernation mode or power-off state, connect the AC adapter to the computer, then press the power button to resume operation. Note: If the system still does not return from sleep mode, your system has stopped responding, and you cannot turn off the computer; reset the computer. Unsaved data may be lost. To reset the computer, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds or more. If the computer is still not reset, remove the AC adapter and the battery. Computer screen problems The screen is blank.

Do the following:

- If you are using the AC adapter, or using the battery, and the battery status indicator is on, press Fn + to make the screen brighter.

- If the power indicator is in blinking, press the power button to resume from the sleep mode.

- If the problem persist, follow the solution in the following problem The screen is unreadable or distorted.

- Press Fn + F2 to confirm whether the LCD screen has been turned off.

Make sure that:

- The display device driver is installed correctly.

- The screen resolution and color quality are correctly set.

- The monitor type is correct. The screen is unreadable or distorted. Incorrect characters appear on the screen.

Did you install the operating system or programs correctly?

If they are installed and configured correctly, have the computer serviced. 37 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Sound problems No sound can be heard from the speaker even when the vol-

ume is turned up. Battery problems Your computer shuts down before the battery status indica-

tor shows empty.

-or-

Your computer operates after the battery status indicator shows empty. The computer does not operate with a fully charged battery. A hard disk drive problem The hard disk drive does not work. A startup problem The Microsoft Windows oper-

ating system does not start.

Make sure that:

- The Mute function is off.

- The headphone jack is not used.

- Speakers are selected as the playback device.

Discharge and recharge the battery.

The surge protector in the battery might be active. Turn off the computer for one minute to reset the protector; then turn on the computer again.

In the Boot menu in BIOS setup utility, make sure that the hard disk drive is included in the Boot priority order correctly.

Use the OneKey Rescue system to help solve or identify your problem. For details about OneKey Rescue system, see Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system on page 30. OneKey Rescue system problems Backup cannot be made.

You are not currently using a Windows operating system.

There is not enough space to store the backed up data. You will need to free more hard disk space on your system partition (C drive). Fail to restore system partition to factory default.

The system partition, such as the partition size or the drive capacity of C, has been modified. 38 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Other problems Your computer does not respond. The computer does not start from a device you want. The connected external device does not work.

To turn off your computer, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds or more. If the computer still does not respond, remove the AC adapter and the battery.

Your computer might lock when it enters sleep mode during a communication operation. Disable the sleep timer when you are working on the network.

See the Boot menu of the BIOS setup utility. Make sure that the Boot priority order in the BIOS setup utility is set so that the computer starts from the device you want.

Also make sure that the device from which the computer starts is enabled. In the Boot menu in the BIOS setup utility, make sure that the device is included in the Boot priority order list.

Press F12 when the Lenovo logo appears on the screen while the computer is starting up to select the device you want the computer starts from.

Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than USB while the computer power is on; otherwise, you might damage your computer.

When using a high power consumption external devices such as an external USB optical disk drive, use external device power adapter. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized, or system shut down may result. 39 Appendix A. CRU instructions Note:The illustrations used in this chapter are of the Lenovo IdeaPad Z380, unless otherwise stated. Replacing the battery pack - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Note: Use only the battery provided by Lenovo. Any other battery could ignite or explode. To replace the battery pack, do the following:

1 Turn off the computer, or enter hibernation mode. Disconnect the AC adapter and all cables from the computer. 2 Close the computer display, and turn the computer over. 3 Unlock the manual battery latch b

. Holding the spring-loaded battery a

, remove the battery pack in the direc-

latch in the unlocked position tion shown by the arrow

. c 1a c b 4 Install a fully charged battery pack. 5 Slide the manual battery latch to the locked position. 6 Turn the computer over and reconnect the AC adapter. 40 Appendix A. CRU instructions Replacing the hard disk drive - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

You can increase the storage capacity of your computer by replacing the hard disk drive with one of greater capacity. You can purchase a new hard disk drive from your reseller or Lenovo marketing representative. Notes:

Replace the hard disk drive only if you upgrade it or have it repaired. The connectors and bay of the hard disk drive were not designed for frequent changes, or drive swapping.

The preinstalled software are not included on an optional hard disk drive. Handling a hard disk drive

Do not drop the drive or subject it to physical shocks. Put the drive on a material, such as soft cloth, that absorbs the physical shock.

Do not apply pressure to the cover of the drive.

Do not touch the connector. The drive is very sensitive. Incorrect handling can cause damage and perma-

nent loss of data on the hard disk. Before removing the hard disk drive, make a backup copy of all the information on the hard disk, and then turn the com-

puter off. Never remove the drive while the system is operating, in sleep mode, or in hibernation mode. 41 Appendix A. CRU instructions To replace the hard disk drive, do the following:

1 Turn off the computer; then disconnect the AC adapter and all cables from the computer. 2 Close the computer display, and then turn the computer over. 3 Remove the battery pack. 4 Remove the Hard disk drive/Memory/Central processing unit/Mini PCI Express Card slot compartment cover. a.Loosen the screws that secure the compartment cover b.Remove the compartment cover b

. a

. b a 42 Appendix A. CRU instructions 5 Remove the frame fixing screws

. c c 6 Pull the tab in the direction shown by arrow d

. a.Hold the tab to lift the hard disk drive a little by arrow b.Pull the tab in the direction shown by arrow d

. d

. d 43 Appendix A. CRU instructions 7 Take out the hard disk drive secured in a metal frame e

. e 8 Remove the screws and detach the metal frame from the hard disk drive. 9 Attach the metal frame to a new hard disk drive and tighten the screws. 0 Put the hard disk drive gently into the hard disk drive bay with the tab facing upwards and the connectors facing each other; then push it firmly into space. A Reinstall the frame fixing screw. B Reinstall the compartment cover and tighten the screws. C Reinstall the battery pack. D Turn the computer over again. Connect the AC adapter and the cables to the computer again. 44 Appendix A. CRU instructions Replacing memory - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

You can increase the amount of memory in your computer by installing a double-data-rate three synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDR3 SDRAM)-available as an option-in the memory slot of your computer. DDR3 SDRAMs are available in various capacities. Note: Use only the memory types supported by your computer. If you incorrectly install optional memory, or install an unsupported memory type, a warning beep will sound when you try to start the computer. To install a DDR3 SDRAM, do the following:

1 Touch a metal table or a grounded metal object to reduce any static electricity in your body, which could damage the DDR3 SDRAM. Do not touch the contact edge of the DDR3 SDRAM. 2 Turn off the computer. Disconnect the AC adapter and all cables from the computer. 3 Close the computer display, and turn the computer over. 4 Remove the battery again. 5 Remove the Hard disk drive/Memory/Central processing unit/Mini PCI Express Card slot compartment cover. a.Loosen the screws that secure the compartment cover b.Remove the compartment cover b

. a

. b a 45 Appendix A. CRU instructions 6 If two DDR3 SDRAMs are already installed in the memory slot, remove one of them to make room for the new one by pressing out on the latches on both edges of the socket at the same time. Be sure to save the old DDR3 SDRAM for future use. b a a 7 Align the notch of the DDR3 SDRAM with the protrusion of the socket and gently insert the DDR3 SDRAM into the socket at a 30-45 angle. 8 Push the DDR3 SDRAM inward toward the socket until the latches on both edges of the socket are pushed into the closed position. b a 9 After aligning the attachment clips with their matching gaps, reinstall the compartment cover. 0 Reinstall and tighten the screws. A Reinstall the battery. B Turn the computer over again. Connect the AC adapter and the cables to the computer again. 46 Appendix A. CRU instructions Note: If only one DDR3 SDRAM is used on the computer you are servicing, the card must be installed in SLOT-0 (

: lower slot), but not in SLOT-1 (

: upper slot). b a To make sure that the DDR3 SDRAM is installed correctly, do as follows:

1 Turn the computer on. 2 Hold F2 during startup. The BIOS setup utility screen opens. The Total Memory item shows the total amount of memory installed in your computer. 47 Appendix A. CRU instructions Removing the optical drive - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

To remove the optical drive, do the following:

1 Remove the Hard disk drive/Memory/Central processing unit/Mini PCI Express Card slot compartment cover. 2 Remove the screw shown in the illustration 3 Gently pull the optical drive out b

. a

. a b 48 Appendix A. CRU instructions The following table provides a list of CRUs for your computer, and informs you of where to find replacement instructions. Setup Poster User Guide AC adapter Power cord for AC adapter Battery pack Bottom access doors Hard disk drive Memory Optical drive O O O O O O O O 49 Trademarks The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Lenovo IdeaPad OneKey VeriFace Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. NVIDIA and Optimus are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of NVIDIA Corporation in the United States and other countries. is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. Premium Surround Sound technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. SRS Premium Surround Sound provides the ultimate audio experience for music, movies and games on the PC. Other company, products, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 50 IMPORTANT NOTE:

Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Radiation Exposure StatementThis EUT is compliance with SAR for general population/uncontrolled exposure limits in ANSI/IEEE C95.1-1999 and had been tested in accordance with the measurement methods and procedures specified in OET Bulletin 65 Supplement C. L e n o v o C h n a i New World. New Thinking.TM www.lenovo.com 2 0 1 1 V1.0_en-US

User Guide Product notice Software terms This guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a refund subject to the refund policy of your place of purchase. For any further information or to request a full refund of the computer, please contact your local point of sale (the seller). Copyright 2012 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: May 2012 Document Part Number: 683556-001 Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). iii iv Safety warning notice Table of contents 1 Starting right ................................................................................................................................................... 1 Best practices ....................................................................................................................................... 1 Fun things to do .................................................................................................................................... 2 More HP resources .............................................................................................................................. 3 2 Getting to know your computer ..................................................................................................................... 4 Finding your hardware and software information ................................................................................. 4 Front ..................................................................................................................................................... 4 Right side ............................................................................................................................................. 5 Left side ................................................................................................................................................ 7 Display .................................................................................................................................................. 8 Top ....................................................................................................................................................... 9 TouchPad ............................................................................................................................ 9 Lights ................................................................................................................................. 10 Buttons, speakers, and fingerprint reader .......................................................................... 12 Keys ................................................................................................................................... 13 Bottom ................................................................................................................................................ 14 Labels ................................................................................................................................................. 16 3 Connecting to a network .............................................................................................................................. 17 Connecting to a wireless network ....................................................................................................... 17 Using the wireless controls ................................................................................................ 17 Using the wireless button .................................................................................. 17 Using HP Connection Manager (select models only) ........................................ 18 Using operating system controls ....................................................................... 18 Using a WLAN ................................................................................................................... 18 Using an Internet service provider .................................................................... 18 Setting up a WLAN ............................................................................................ 20 Configuring a wireless router ............................................................................ 20 Protecting your WLAN ....................................................................................... 20 Connecting to a WLAN ...................................................................................... 21 v Using Bluetooth wireless devices ...................................................................................... 21 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) .......................................................................................... 22 4 Enjoying entertainment features ................................................................................................................. 23 Using the webcam .............................................................................................................................. 25 Using audio ........................................................................................................................................ 25 Connecting speakers ......................................................................................................... 25 Connecting headphones .................................................................................................... 25 Connecting a microphone .................................................................................................. 25 Using Beats Audio ............................................................................................................. 25 Accessing Beats Audio Control Panel ............................................................... 25 Enabling and Disabling Beats Audio ................................................................. 26 Checking the sound ........................................................................................................... 26 Using video ......................................................................................................................................... 26 Connecting a VGA monitor or projector ............................................................................. 27 Connecting an HDMI TV or monitor ................................................................................... 27 Configuring audio settings (with HDMI TV) ....................................................... 28 Using Intel Wireless Display and Wireless Music (select models only) ............................. 29 Managing your audio and video files .................................................................................................. 29 5 Using the keyboard and pointing devices .................................................................................................. 30 Using ALT GR key combinations ....................................................................................................... 31 Using the action keys ......................................................................................................................... 32 Using the hot keys .............................................................................................................................. 34 Using the keypad ................................................................................................................................ 35 Using the integrated numeric keypad ................................................................................ 35 Using the TouchPad ........................................................................................................................... 36 Turning the TouchPad off or on ......................................................................................... 36 Navigating .......................................................................................................................... 37 Selecting ............................................................................................................................ 37 Using TouchPad gestures ................................................................................................. 38 Scrolling ............................................................................................................ 39 Pinching/Zooming ............................................................................................. 39 Rotating ............................................................................................................. 40 Flicking .............................................................................................................. 40 6 Managing power ............................................................................................................................................ 41 Using Sleep or Hibernation ................................................................................................................ 41 Initiating and exiting Sleep ................................................................................................. 42 Initiating and exiting Hibernation ........................................................................................ 42 vi Setting password protection on wakeup ............................................................................ 42 Using the power meter ....................................................................................................................... 43 Selecting a power plan ....................................................................................................................... 43 Running on battery power .................................................................................................................. 44 Removing a user-replaceable battery ................................................................................ 44 Finding battery information ................................................................................................ 45 Conserving battery power .................................................................................................. 45 Identifying low battery levels .............................................................................................. 45 Storing a user-replaceable battery ..................................................................................... 45 Disposing of a user-replaceable battery ............................................................................ 46 Replacing a user-replaceable battery ................................................................................ 46 Running on external power ................................................................................................................ 46 HP CoolSense .................................................................................................................................... 47 Refreshing your software content with Intel Smart Connect Technology (select models only) .......... 47 Shutting down the computer ............................................................................................................... 47 7 Managing and sharing information ............................................................................................................. 49 Using a USB device ........................................................................................................................... 49 Connecting a USB device .................................................................................................. 50 Removing a USB device .................................................................................................... 50 Connecting a powered USB device ................................................................................... 50 Inserting and removing a digital storage card .................................................................................... 51 Using optical drives ............................................................................................................................ 52 Inserting an optical disc ..................................................................................................... 53 Removing an optical disc ................................................................................................... 53 Sharing drives on the network ........................................................................................... 54 8 Maintaining your computer .......................................................................................................................... 55 Improving performance ...................................................................................................................... 55 Handling drives .................................................................................................................. 55 Replacing a hard drive ....................................................................................................... 56 Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select models only) .................................................................. 57 Using Disk Defragmenter ................................................................................................... 57 Using Disk Cleanup ........................................................................................................... 58 Adding or replacing memory modules ............................................................................... 58 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................... 61 Cleaning your computer ..................................................................................................................... 61 Cleaning the display, sides, and cover .............................................................................. 61 Cleaning the TouchPad and keyboard .............................................................................. 61 Traveling with or shipping your computer ........................................................................................... 62 vii 9 Securing your computer and information .................................................................................................. 63 Locating your security software .......................................................................................................... 63 Using passwords ................................................................................................................................ 64 Setting Windows passwords .............................................................................................. 64 Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords ............................................................................. 65 Using the fingerprint reader ................................................................................................................ 65 Using HP SimplePass ........................................................................................................ 66 Registering fingerprints ..................................................................................... 66 Using your registered fingerprint to log on to Windows ..................................... 66 Using Internet security software ......................................................................................................... 66 Using antivirus software ..................................................................................................... 67 Using firewall software ....................................................................................................... 67 Installing software updates ................................................................................................................. 67 Installing Windows security updates .................................................................................. 67 Installing HP and third-party software updates .................................................................. 67 Securing your wireless network .......................................................................................................... 68 Backing up your software applications and information ..................................................................... 68 Using an optional security cable lock ................................................................................................. 68 10 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and System Diagnostics ............................................................................... 69 Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) ............................................................................................................... 69 Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 69 Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................... 69 Downloading a BIOS update ............................................................................................. 70 Using System Diagnostics .................................................................................................................. 71 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering ..................................................................................................... 72 Creating backups ............................................................................................................................... 72 Creating recovery media to recover the original system .................................................... 72 What you need to know ..................................................................................... 72 Creating the recovery media ............................................................ 73 Creating system restore points .......................................................................................... 73 What you need to know ..................................................................................... 73 Creating a system restore point ........................................................................ 73 Backing up system and personal information .................................................................... 74 Tips for a successful backup ............................................................................. 74 What you need to know ..................................................................................... 74 Creating a backup using Windows Backup and Restore .................................. 75 Restore and recovery ......................................................................................................................... 76 Restoring to a previous system restore point .................................................................... 76 viii Restoring specific files ....................................................................................................... 76 Restoring specific files using Windows Backup and Restore ............................ 76 Recovering the original system using HP Recovery Manager ........................................... 76 What you need to know ..................................................................................... 76 Recovering using HP Recovery partition (select models only) ......................... 77 Recovering using the recovery media ............................................................... 77 Changing the computer boot order ................................................... 78 12 Specifications .............................................................................................................................................. 79 Input power ......................................................................................................................................... 79 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................... 80 13 Troubleshooting and support .................................................................................................................... 81 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................. 82 Disc drive problems ........................................................................................................... 82 Wireless connection problems ........................................................................................... 82 Cannot connect to a WLAN ............................................................................... 83 Cannot connect to a preferred network ............................................................. 83 Current network security codes are unavailable ............................................... 83 WLAN connection is very weak ......................................................................... 84 Cannot connect to the wireless router ............................................................... 84 Network status icon is not displayed ................................................................. 85 Audio problems .................................................................................................................. 85 Power management problems ........................................................................................... 85 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................. 86 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ....... 86 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available .... 86 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ....................................................................................... 86 Troubleshooting an AC adapter ........................................................................ 86 Contacting support ............................................................................................................................. 87 14 Electrostatic Discharge .............................................................................................................................. 88 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 89 ix x 1 Starting right This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment. To get the most out of your computer, read this chapter to learn about best practices after setup, fun things to do with your computer, and where to go to get more HP resources. Best practices To protect your smart investment, after you set up and register the computer, we recommend the following steps:

If you havent already done so, connect to a wired or wireless network. See details in Connecting to a network on page 17. Become familiar with the computer hardware and software. Go to Getting to know your computer on page 4 and Enjoying entertainment features on page 23 for information. Update or purchase antivirus software. Learn more at Using antivirus software on page 67. Back up your hard drive by creating recovery discs or a recovery flash drive. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 72. Best practices 1 Fun things to do You know you can watch a YouTube video on the computer. But did you know that you can also connect your computer to a TV and watch the video on TV? For more information, see Connecting an HDMI TV or monitor on page 27. You know you can listen to music on the computer. But did you know that you can also stream live radio to the computer and listen to music or talk radio from all over the world? See Using audio on page 25. You know you can create a powerful presentation with Microsoft applications. But did you know you can also connect to a projector to share your ideas with a group? See Connecting a VGA monitor or projector on page 27. 2 Chapter 1 Starting right More HP resources You have already used Setup Instructions to turn on the computer and locate this guide. For product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Resource Setup Instructions Help and Support To access Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support. For more details, go to http://www.hp.com/

support. Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides, or go to http://www.hp.com/

ergo. Worldwide support To get support in your language, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices To access this guide, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Contents Overview of computer setup and features. A broad range of how-to information and troubleshooting tips. Proper workstation setup. Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury. Electrical and mechanical safety information. Chat online with an HP technician. Email support. Find support telephone numbers. Locate HP service center locations. Important regulatory notices, including proper battery disposal information. Limited Warranty*

Specific warranty information about this computer. To access the warranty, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides or go to http://www.hp.com/

go/orderdocuments.

*You can find the expressly provided HP Limited Warranty applicable to your product located with the user guides on your computer and/or on the CD/DVD provided in the box. In some countries/regions, HP may provide a printed HP Limited Warranty in the box. For countries/regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you may request a printed copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments or write to:

North America: Hewlett-Packard, MS POD, 11311 Chinden Blvd., Boise, ID 83714, USA Europe, Middle East, Africa: Hewlett-Packard, POD, Via G. Di Vittorio, 9, 20063, Cernusco s/Naviglio (MI), Italy Asia Pacific: Hewlett-Packard, POD, P.O. Box 200, Alexandra Post Office, Singapore 911507 When you request a printed copy of your warranty, please include your product number, warranty period (found on your service label), name, and postal address. IMPORTANT: Do NOT return your HP product to the addresses above. For U.S. product support, go to http://www.hp.com/

go/contactHP. For worldwide product support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html More HP resources 3 2 Getting to know your computer Finding your hardware and software information Select Start > Computer. A list displays all the devices installed in your computer, including optical drives, solid-state drives

(SSD), or a secondary hard drive. To find out what software is included on your computer, select Start > All Programs. Front Component Digital Media Slot Description Supports the following digital card formats:

Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card Secure Digital Extended Capacity (SDxC) Memory Card Secure Digital High Capacity (SDHC) Memory Card Ultra High Speed MultiMediaCard (UHS/MMC) 4 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Right side Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Optical drive Optical drive light Description Reads and writes (select models only) to an optical disc. Green: The optical drive is being accessed. Off: The optical drive is idle. Optical drive eject button Releases the disc tray. Power light White: The computer is on. Blinking white: The computer is in the Sleep state, which is an energy-saving mode. The computer shuts off power to the display and other unneeded components. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Hibernation is an energy-saving mode that uses the least amount of power. NOTE: For select models, the Intel Rapid Start Technology feature is enabled at the factory. Rapid Start Technology allows your computer to resume quickly from inactivity. For more information, see Using Sleep or Hibernation on page 41. Blinking white: The hard drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive. NOTE: For information about HP 3D DriveGuard, see Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select models only) on page 57. Connects an optional USB 3.0 device and provides enhanced USB power performance. NOTE: For details about different types of USB ports, see Using a USB device on page 49. USB 2.0 port Connects an optional USB device. Right side 5

(5) Hard drive light USB 3.0 port

(6)

(7) Component

(8) AC adapter light

(9)

(10) Power connector Security cable slot Description White: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charged. Amber: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charging. Off: The computer is using DC power. Connects an AC adapter. Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. 6 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Left side Component

(1) Vent Description Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation.

(2)

(3)

(4) External monitor port Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. HDMI port Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, or any compatible digital or audio device. RJ-45 (network) jack Connects a network cable.

(5) RJ-45 (network) jack lights White (top): The network is connected.

(6)

(7) USB 3.0 ports (2) Audio-out (headphone) jack/Audio-in

(microphone) jack Amber (bottom): Activity is occurring on the network. Connect an optional USB 3.0 device and provide enhanced USB power performance. NOTE: For details about different types of USB ports, see Using a USB device on page 49. Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or television audio. Also connects an optional headset microphone. The jack does not support optional microphone-only devices. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before using headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. Left side 7 Display Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Internal microphones (2) Webcam light HP TrueVision HD Webcam

(4) WLAN antennas (2)*

Description Record sound. On: The webcam is in use. Records video, captures still photographs, and allows video conferences and online chat by means of streaming video. To use the webcam, select Start > All Programs >

Communication and Chat > CyberLink YouCam. Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs).

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. These notices are located in Help and Support. 8 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Top TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) TouchPad on/off button TouchPad light TouchPad zone Left TouchPad button Right TouchPad button Description Turns the TouchPad on or off. On: The TouchPad is off. Off: The TouchPad is on. Moves the on-screen pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Top 9 Lights Component Description

(1) Power light White: The computer is on. Blinking white: The computer is in the Sleep state, which is an energy-saving mode. The computer shuts off power to the display and other unneeded components. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Hibernation is an energy-saving mode that uses the least amount of power. NOTE: For select models, the Intel Rapid Start Technology feature is enabled at the factory. Rapid Start Technology allows your computer to resume quickly from inactivity. For more information, see Using Sleep or Hibernation on page 41. On: Caps lock is on, which switches the keys to all capital letters. Amber: Computer sound is off. Off: Computer sound is on. White: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. Amber: All wireless devices are off.

(2)

(3)

(4) Caps lock light Mute light Wireless light 10 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Component

(5)

(6) TouchPad light Description On: The TouchPad is off. Off: The TouchPad is on. Fingerprint reader light White: The fingerprint was read. Amber: The fingerprint was not read. Top 11 Buttons, speakers, and fingerprint reader Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button down briefly to exit Hibernation. CAUTION: Pressing and holding down the power button will result in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and Microsoft Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button down for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, select Start >

Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options, or see Managing power on page 41. Produce sound. Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. Component

(1) Power button

(2)

(3) Speakers (2) Fingerprint reader 12 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Keys Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the b key or the esc key. Windows logo key Displays the Windows Start menu. b key Enables or disables Beats Audio when pressed in combination with the fn key. Beats Audio is an enhanced audio feature that provides a deep, controlled bass while maintaining a clear sound. Beats Audio is enabled by default. NOTE: You can open the Beats Audio Control Panel by selecting Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >

Beats Audio Control Panel. Action keys Execute frequently used system functions. Windows applications key Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the cursor. num lock key

(8) Integrated numeric keypad Controls the function of the integrated numeric keypad. Press the key to alternate between the standard numeric function of an external keypad (enabled at the factory) and the navigational function (indicated by the directional arrows on the keys). NOTE: The keypad function that is active when the computer is turned off is reinstated when the computer is turned back on. Set at the factory to function like an external numeric keypad. To alternate between this numeric function and the navigational function (indicated by the directional arrows on the keys), press the num lock key. Top 13 Bottom Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Integrated subwoofer Provides superior bass sound. Description Battery bay Battery release latch Holds the battery. Releases the battery from the battery bay and opens the service door. Vents (4) Enable airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. 14 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Component Description

(5) Wireless module compartment Holds the wireless local area network (WLAN) device. CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system, replace the wireless module only with a wireless module authorized for use in the computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country or region. If you replace the module and then receive a warning message, remove the module to restore computer functionality, and then contact support through Help and Support.

(6) Optical drive compartment, hard drive bay, wireless module compartment, and memory module compartment The service door provides access to the optical drive compartment, hard drive bay, wireless module compartment, and memory module compartment. Bottom 15 Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. The labels are in easily accessible locations. Service labelProvides important information, including the following:

Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Product name Serial number Product part number

(4) Warranty period

(5) Model description (select models only) Have this information available when you contact technical support. The service label is affixed inside the battery bay. Microsoft Certificate of AuthenticityContains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. The Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity is located on the bottom of the computer. Regulatory labelProvides regulatory information about the computer. The regulatory label is affixed inside the battery bay. Wireless certification label or labelsProvide information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings of some of the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. If your computer model includes one or more wireless devices, one or more certification labels are included with your computer. You may need this information when traveling internationally. Wireless certification labels are affixed inside the battery bay. 16 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer 3 Connecting to a network Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter will help you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Wireless technology transfers data across radio waves instead of wires. Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

Wireless local area network (WLAN) deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-

enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. For more information about wireless technology, see the information and website links provided in Help and Support. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using these features:

Wireless button, wireless switch, or wireless key (referred to in this chapter as the wireless button) HP Connection Manager software Operating system controls Using the wireless button The computer has a wireless button, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights, depending on the model. All of the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory, so the wireless light is on (white) when you turn on the computer. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. If the wireless light is white, at least one wireless device is on. If the wireless light is off, all wireless devices are off. Connecting to a wireless network 17 NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. Because the wireless devices are enabled at the factory, you can use the wireless button to turn on or turn off the wireless devices simultaneously. Individual wireless devices can be controlled through HP Connection Manager. Using HP Connection Manager (select models only) HP Connection Manager provides a central location for managing your wireless devices. HP Connection Manager allows you to manage the following devices:

Wireless local area network (WLAN)/Wi-Fi Bluetooth HP Connection Manager provides information and notifications on connection status and power status. Status information and notifications are provided in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. To open HP Connection Manager, select Start > All Programs > HP Help and Support > HP Connection Manager. For more details about using HP Connection Manager, see the HP Connection Manager software Help. Using operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, manage wireless networks, and diagnose and repair network problems. To use operating system controls, select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. For more information, select Start > Help and Support. Using a WLAN With a WLAN device, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other computers and accessories that are linked by a wireless router or a wireless access point. NOTE: The terms wireless router and wireless access point are often used interchangeably. A large-scale WLAN, such as a corporate or public WLAN, typically uses wireless access points that can accommodate a large number of computers and accessories and can separate critical network functions. A home or small office WLAN typically uses a wireless router, which allows several wireless and wired computers to share an Internet connection, a printer, and files without requiring additional pieces of hardware or software. To use the WLAN device in your computer, you must connect to a WLAN infrastructure (provided through a service provider or a public or corporate network). Using an Internet service provider When you are setting up Internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an Internet service provider (ISP). To purchase Internet service, contact a local ISP. 18 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network NOTE: Your ISP will give you a user ID and a password to use for Internet access. Record this information and store it in a safe place. Connecting to a wireless network 19 Setting up a WLAN To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet, you need the following equipment:

A broadband modem (either DSL or cable) (1) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider A wireless router (2) (purchased separately) A wireless computer (3) NOTE: Some modems have a built-in wireless router. Check with your ISP to determine what type of modem you have. The illustration below shows an example of a wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet. As your network grows, additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to the network to access the Internet. For help in setting up your WLAN, see the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. Configuring a wireless router For help in setting up a WLAN, see the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. NOTE:

It is recommended that you initially connect your new wireless computer to the router by using the network cable provided with the router. When the computer successfully connects to the Internet, disconnect the cable, and access the Internet through your wireless network. Protecting your WLAN When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. WLANs in public areas (hotspots) like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. If you are concerned about the security of your computer in a hotspot, limit your network activities to email that is not confidential and basic Internet surfing. Wireless radio signals travel outside the network, so other WLAN devices can pick up unprotected signals. Take the following precautions to protect your WLAN:

Use a firewall. A firewall checks both data and requests for data that are sent to your network, and discards any suspicious items. Firewalls are available in both software and hardware. Some networks use a combination of both types. Use wireless encryption. Wireless encryption uses security settings to encrypt and decrypt data that is transmitted over the network. For more information, see Help and Support. 20 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network Connecting to a WLAN To connect to the WLAN, follow these steps:

1. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. If the device is on, the wireless light is on. If the wireless light is off, press the wireless button. NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. 2. Click the network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 3. Select your WLAN from the list. 4. Click Connect. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Type the code, and then click OK to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you may be out of range of a wireless router or access point. If you do not see the WLAN you want to connect to, click Open Network and Sharing NOTE:

Center, and then click Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, allowing you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. After the connection is made, place the mouse pointer over the network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using Bluetooth wireless devices A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Computers (desktop, notebook, PDA) Phones (cellular, cordless, smart phone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Mouse Bluetooth devices provide peer-to-peer capability that allows you to set up a personal area network

(PAN) of Bluetooth devices. For information about configuring and using Bluetooth devices, see the Bluetooth software Help. Connecting to a wireless network 21 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly), or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. Connecting to a LAN requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 network cable. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

1. 2. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents NOTE:

interference from TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. 22 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network 4 Enjoying entertainment features Use your HP computer as an entertainment hub to socialize via the webcam, enjoy and manage your music, and download and watch movies. Or, to make your computer an even more powerful entertainment center, connect external devices like speakers, headphones, monitor, projector, TV, and, on select models, high-definition devices. Multimedia Features Here are some of the entertainment features on your computer. Component

(1)

(2) Internal microphones (2) Description Record sound. Webcam light On: The webcam is in use. 23 Component Description

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13) HP TrueVision HD Webcam Records video, captures still photographs, allows you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. To use the webcam, select Start > All Programs >

Communication and Chat > CyberLink YouCam. Integrated subwoofer Provides superior bass sound. USB 2.0 port Connects an optional USB device. USB 3.0 ports (2) Optical drive b key fn key Audio-out (headphone) jack/Audio-in

(microphone) jack HDMI port NOTE: For details about different types of USB ports, see Using a USB device on page 49. Connect optional USB 3.0 devices and provide enhanced USB power performance. Reads and writes (select models only) to an optical disc. Enables or disables Beats Audio when pressed in combination with the fn key. Beats Audio is an enhanced audio profile that provides a deep, controlled bass while maintaining a clear sound. Beats Audio is enabled by default. You can view and control the bass settings through the Windows operating system. To view and control the bass properties:

Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Beats Audio Control Panel. Enables or disables Beats Audio when pressed in combination with the b key. Produces sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or television audio. Also connects an optional headset microphone. The jack does not support optional microphone-only devices. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed HDMI device. External monitor port Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. Speakers (2) Produce sound. 24 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features Using the webcam Your computer has an integrated webcam, a powerful social networking tool that allows you to communicate up close with friends and colleagues next door or on the other side of the world. With the webcam, you can stream video with your instant messaging software, capture and share video, and take still photos. To start the webcam, select Start > All Programs > Communication and Chat > CyberLink YouCam. For details about using the webcam, select Start > Help and Support. Using audio On your HP computer, you can play music CDs, download and listen to music, stream audio content from the web (including radio), record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach external audio devices such as speakers or headphones. Connecting speakers You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to USB ports (or the audio-out jack) on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To connect high-definition speakers to the computer, see Configuring audio settings (with HDMI TV) on page 28. Before connecting audio devices, be sure to adjust the volume. Connecting headphones You can connect wired headphones to the headphone jack on your computer. To connect wireless headphones to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. Connecting a microphone To record audio, connect a headset microphone to the audio-out (headphone) jack/audio-in

(microphone) jack on the computer. For best results when recording, speak directly into the headset microphone and record sound in a setting free of background noise. Using Beats Audio Beats Audio is an enhanced audio feature that provides a deep, controlled bass while maintaining a clear sound. Accessing Beats Audio Control Panel Beats Audio Control Panel allows you to view and manually control audio and bass settings. To open Beats Audio Control Panel, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Beats Audio Control Panel. Using the webcam 25 Enabling and Disabling Beats Audio To enable or disable Beats Audio, press the fn key in combination with the b key. The following table explains the meaning of the Beats Audio icons that appear on the screen when you press the Beats Audio hot key (fn+b). Icon Definition Beats Audio is enabled. Beats Audio is disabled. Checking the sound To check the audio functions on your computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Sound. 2. When the Sound window opens, click the Sounds tab. Under Program Events, select any sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and click the Test button. You should hear sound through the speakers or through connected headphones. To check the recording functions on your computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Sound Recorder. 2. Click Start Recording and speak into the microphone. Save the file to your desktop. 3. Open a multimedia program and play the recording. To confirm or change the audio settings on your computer, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Sound. Using video Your HP computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer, without needing to access a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. Most computers have a video graphics array (VGA) port, which connects analog video devices. Some computers also have a high-definition multimedia interface

(HDMI) port, which allows you to connect a high-definition monitor or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Check the device manufacturer's instructions if you have questions. 26 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features Connecting a VGA monitor or projector To see the computer screen image on an external VGA monitor or projected for a presentation, connect a monitor or projector to the computer's VGA port. To connect a monitor or projector:

1. Connect the VGA cable from the monitor or projector to the VGA port on the computer as shown. 2. Press f4 to alternate the screen image between 4 display states:

Computer only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and external device. External device only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. NOTE: Adjust the screen resolution of the external device, especially if you choose the Extend option. Go to Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Personalization > Adjust screen resolution for best results. Connecting an HDMI TV or monitor To see the computer screen image on a high-definition TV or monitor, connect the high-definition device according to the following instructions. To connect an HDMI device to your computer, you need an HDMI cable, sold separately. Using video 27 To connect a high-definition TV or monitor to your computer:

1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the high-definition TV or monitor. 3. Press f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

Computer only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and external device. External device only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. NOTE: Adjust the screen resolution of the external device, especially if you choose the Extend option. Go to Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Personalization > Adjust screen resolution for best results. Configuring audio settings (with HDMI TV) HDMI is the only video interface that supports high-definition video and audio. After you connect an HDMI TV to the computer, you can then turn on HDMI audio by following these steps:

1. Right-click the Speaker icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click Digital Output Device (HDMI). 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. 28 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features To return the audio stream to the computer speakers, follow these steps:

1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click Speakers. 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. Using Intel Wireless Display and Wireless Music (select models only) Intel Wireless Display and Wireless Music allow you to transmit your computer content wirelessly to your receive/display device, such as HDTV, monitor, projector, game console, Blu-ray player, or DVR, by using an optional wireless adapter (purchased separately). For details about using the wireless adapter, see the manufacturer's instructions. To open Intel Wireless Display, select Start > All Programs > Intel WiDi. NOTE: Before using the wireless display feature, be sure that your wireless device is turned on. Managing your audio and video files CyberLink PowerDVD helps you manage and edit your photo and video collections. To start CyberLink PowerDVD, select Start > All Programs > Music, Photos and Videos, and then click CyberLink PowerDVD. For more information about using CyberLink PowerDVD, see the PowerDVD software Help. Managing your audio and video files 29 5 Using the keyboard and pointing devices Your computer allows easy on-screen navigation with a keyboard, pointing device, and on select models, an integrated numeric keypad. Select models also have action keys or hot key shortcuts that enable you to do common tasks. The TouchPad enables you to perform on-screen functions similar to those done by an external mouse. To customize pointing device settings, such as button configuration, click speed, and pointer options, select Start > Control Panel and type mouse in the search box in the upper-right corner of the screen. Click Mouse to explore the pointing device features and to select preferred settings. Use an external USB mouse (purchased separately) by connecting it to one of the USB ports on the computer. NOTE: On some models, the TouchPad is called ClickPad or Imagepad. The keyboard allows you to type and the action keys and hot keys allow you to perform specific functions. For more details about the keyboard keys, see Keys on page 13. NOTE: Depending on the country or region, your keyboard may have different keys and keyboard functions than those discussed in this section. 30 Chapter 5 Using the keyboard and pointing devices Using ALT GR key combinations Some countries have keyboards with an ALT GR key that is used for special key combinations. To type the rupee symbol on a keyboard that includes this key, use the alt gr+4 key combination. Region-specific keyboards in India can use the ctrl+shift+4 keys for the rupee symbol. To learn about ALT GR key combinations, go to the Microsoft Office website, http://www.office.microsoft.com, and search for ALT GR. Using ALT GR key combinations 31 Using the action keys An action key performs an assigned function. The icon on each of the f1 through f12 keys illustrates the assigned function for that key. To use an action key function, press and hold the key. The action key feature is enabled at the factory. You can disable this feature in Setup Utility (BIOS). See Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and System Diagnostics on page 69 for instructions on opening Setup Utility (BIOS), and then follow the instructions at the bottom of the screen. To activate the assigned function after disabling the action key feature, you must press the fn key in combination with the appropriate action key. CAUTION: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility. Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Icon Key f1 f2 f3 f4 f5 f6 f7 f8 f9 Description Opens Help and Support, which provides tutorials, information about the Windows operating system and your computer, answers to questions, and updates to your computer. Help and Support also provides automated troubleshooting tools and access to support. Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Switches the screen image between display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, pressing this key alternates the screen image from the computer display to the monitor display to a simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Most external monitors receive video information from the computer using the external VGA video standard. This action key can also alternate images among other devices that are receiving video information from the computer. For select models, turns the radiance backlight keyboard feature off or on. NOTE: To conserve battery power, turn off this feature. To switch between low, medium, or high brightness levels, press and hold this key in combination with either the up or down arrow key. Plays the previous track of an audio CD or the previous section of a DVD or a BD. Begins, pauses, or resumes playback of an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD. Plays the next track of an audio CD or the next section of a DVD or a BD. Decreases speaker volume incrementally as long as you hold down the key. f10 Increases speaker volume incrementally as long as you hold down the key. 32 Chapter 5 Using the keyboard and pointing devices Icon Key f11 f12 Description Mutes or restores speaker sound. Turns the wireless feature on or off. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. Using the action keys 33 Using the hot keys A hot key is a combination of the fn key and either the esc key or the b key. To use a hot key:

Briefly press the fn key, and then briefly press the second key of the combination. Function Hot key Description Display system information. fn+esc Displays information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number. Control the bass settings. fn+b Enables or disables the Beats Audio bass settings. Beats Audio is an enhanced audio feature that provides a deep, controlled bass while maintaining a clear sound. Beats Audio is enabled by default. You can view and control the bass settings through the Windows operating system. To view and control the bass properties:

Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Beats Audio Control Panel. 34 Chapter 5 Using the keyboard and pointing devices Using the keypad Using the integrated numeric keypad The computer includes an integrated numeric keypad, and it also supports an optional external numeric keypad or an optional external keyboard that includes a numeric keypad. Component num lock key Integrated numeric keypad Description Controls the function of the integrated numeric keypad. Press the key to alternate between the standard numeric function of an external keypad (selected at the factory) and the navigational function (indicated by the directional arrows on the keys). NOTE: The keypad function that is active when the computer is turned off is reinstated when the computer is turned back on. Set at the factory to function like an external numeric keypad. To alternate between this numeric function and the navigational function (indicated by the directional arrows on the keys), press the num lock key. Using the keypad 35 Using the TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) TouchPad on/off button TouchPad light TouchPad zone Left TouchPad button Right TouchPad button Description Turns the TouchPad on or off. On: The TouchPad is off. Off: The TouchPad is on. Moves the on-screen pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. To move the pointer, slide one finger across the TouchPad in the direction you want the pointer to go. Use the left and right TouchPad buttons as you would use the buttons on an external mouse. Turning the TouchPad off or on To turn the TouchPad off or on, quickly double-tap the TouchPad on/off button. The TouchPad light is off when the TouchPad is on. 36 Chapter 5 Using the keyboard and pointing devices Navigating To move the on-screen pointer, slide one finger across the TouchPad in the direction you want the pointer to go. Selecting Use the left and right TouchPad buttons as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. Using the TouchPad 37 Using TouchPad gestures The TouchPad supports a variety of gestures that let your fingers swipe, pinch, and rotate to manipulate items on the desktop. To use TouchPad gestures, place two fingers on the TouchPad at the same time. NOTE: TouchPad gestures are not supported in all programs. To view the demonstration of a gesture:

1. 2. 3. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound. Select your Synaptics TouchPad device. Select a gesture to activate the demonstration. To turn the gestures off or on:

1. 2. 3. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound. Select your Synaptics TouchPad device. Select the check box next to the gesture that you want to turn off or on. 4. Click Apply, and then click OK. 38 Chapter 5 Using the keyboard and pointing devices Scrolling Scrolling is useful for moving up, down, or sideways on a page or image. To scroll, place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad, and then drag them across the TouchPad in an up, down, left, or right motion. NOTE: Scrolling speed is controlled by finger speed. Pinching/Zooming Pinching allows you to zoom in or out on images or text. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the TouchPad, and then moving them apart. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the TouchPad, and then moving them together. Using the TouchPad 39 Rotating Rotating allows you to rotate items such as photos. To rotate, anchor your left forefinger in the TouchPad zone. Move the right forefinger around the anchored finger in a sweeping motion, moving from 12 oclock to 3 oclock. To reverse the rotation, move your right forefinger from 3 oclock to 12 oclock. NOTE: Rotating is disabled at the factory by default. Flicking Flicking allows you to navigate through screens or quickly scroll through documents. To flick, use three fingers to touch the TouchPad zone in a light, quick flicking motion up, down, left, or right. NOTE: Three-finger flicking is disabled at the factory by default. 40 Chapter 5 Using the keyboard and pointing devices 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is only running on battery power and an AC power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Your computer supports power plans to manage how your computer uses and conserves power so that you can balance computer performance with power conservation. Using Sleep or Hibernation Microsoft Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. NOTE: For select models, the Intel Rapid Start Technology (RST) feature is enabled at the factory. Rapid Start Technology allows your computer to resume quickly from inactivity. Rapid Start Technology manages your power-saving options as follows:

SleepRapid Start Technology allows you to select the Sleep state. To exit from Sleep, press any key, activate the TouchPad, or press the power button briefly. HibernationRapid Start Technology initiates Hibernation under the following conditions:

After 2 hours of inactivity when the computer is running on battery or external power. When the battery reaches a critical level. After Hibernation is initiated, press the power button to resume your work. Because Hibernation is controlled by Rapid Start Technology, you cannot manually select Hibernation. Rapid Start Technology can be disabled in Setup Utility (BIOS). If Rapid Start Technology is disabled, Hibernation options can be manually selected. When Sleep is initiated, the screen clears, and your work is saved to memory, allowing you to resume your work faster than when you exit Hibernation. If the computer is in the Sleep state for an extended period or if the battery reaches a critical battery level while in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file on the hard drive and the computer turns off. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep or Hibernation while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. NOTE: You cannot initiate any type of networking connection or perform any computer functions while the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation. Using Sleep or Hibernation 41 Initiating and exiting Sleep The system is set at the factory to initiate Sleep after a specific period of inactivity, depending on whether the computer is running on battery power or on external power. Power settings and timeouts can be changed using Power Options in Windows Control Panel. With the computer on, you can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly press the power button. Close the display. Select Start, click the arrow next to the Shut down button, and then click Sleep. To exit Sleep:

Briefly press the power button. If the display is closed, open the display. Press a key on the keyboard. Tap or swipe the TouchPad. When the computer exits Sleep, the power lights turn on and the computer displays the screen as it was when you stopped working. NOTE:

Windows password before the computer redisplays your work. If you have set the computer to require a password on wakeup, you must enter your Initiating and exiting Hibernation The system is set at the factory to initiate Hibernation after a specific period of inactivity, depending on whether the computer is running on battery power or on external power, or when the battery reaches a critical battery level. Power settings and timeouts can be changed in Windows Control Panel. To initiate Hibernation, select Start, click the arrow next to the Shut down button, and then click Hibernate. To exit Hibernation, briefly press the power button. The power lights turn on and the computer returns to the screen where you stopped working. NOTE:

password before the computer will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows Setting password protection on wakeup To set the computer to prompt for a password when exiting Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options. In the left pane, click Require a password on wakeup. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 42 Chapter 6 Managing power 4. Click Require a password (recommended). If you need to create a user account password or change your current user account NOTE:

password, click Create or change your user account password, and then follow the on-

screen instructions. 5. Click Save changes. Using the power meter The power meter allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To display the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, move the pointer over the Power Meter icon, at the far right of the taskbar. To access Power Options, or to change the power plan, click the Power Meter icon and select an item from the list. Different power meter icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. The battery icon displays a message if the battery reaches a low or critical battery level. Selecting a power plan A power plan manages how the computer uses power and helps you conserve power and maximize performance. The following power plans are available:

HP Recommended. Automatically balances performance with energy conservation. Power Saver. Saves power by reducing system performance and screen brightness. High Performance. Favors performance, but may use more energy. You can also create your own power plan and customize it to suit your needs. Use HP Power Manager (select models only) or Windows Control Panel to select a power plan or to create your own plan. To start HP Power Manager, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > HP Power Manager. To access the Power Options in the Control Panel, select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Power Options, and then select a power plan from the list. Using the power meter 43 Running on battery power When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power and the display brightness decreases to conserve battery life. The battery in the computer slowly discharges when the computer is off and unplugged from external power. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, display brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Removing a user-replaceable battery Your computer includes a user-replaceable battery. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the user-replaceable battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. CAUTION: Removing a battery that is the sole power source for the computer can cause loss of information. So before removing the battery, save your work and initiate Hibernation, or shut down the computer through Windows. To remove the battery:

1. 2. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. Slide the battery release latch (1) to release the battery. NOTE: The battery release latch automatically returns to its original position. 3. Pivot the battery (2) upward and remove it from the computer (3). 44 Chapter 6 Managing power Finding battery information Help and Support provides the following tools and information about the battery:

Battery Check tool in Help and Support to test battery performance Information about calibration, power management, and proper care and storage to maximize battery life Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity To access battery information, select Start > Help and Support > Learn > Power Plans:

Frequently Asked Questions. Conserving battery power Use the following tips for conserving battery power and maximizing battery life:

Lower the brightness on the display. Select the Power saver setting in Power Options. Remove the battery from the computer when it is not being used or charged. Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your computer, initiate Sleep or Hibernation, or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the power meter icon in the notification area displays a low or critical battery notification. NOTE: For additional information about the power meter, see Using the power meter on page 43. The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. If Hibernation is disabled, and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state, and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. Storing a user-replaceable battery CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to a battery, do not expose it to high temperatures for extended periods of time. If your computer will be unused and unplugged from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately in a cool, dry place to prolong the battery charge. A stored battery should be checked every 6 months. If the capacity is less than 50 percent, recharge the battery before returning it to storage. Running on battery power 45 Disposing of a user-replaceable battery WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. See the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices for proper battery disposal. To access this guide, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. Replacing a user-replaceable battery Battery Check in Help and Support notifies you to replace the battery when an internal cell is not charging properly or when the battery storage capacity has reached a weak condition. If the battery is possibly covered by an HP warranty, instructions include a warranty ID. A message refers you to the HP website for more information about ordering a replacement battery. Running on external power For information about connecting to AC power, see the Setup Instructions provided in the computer box. The computer does not use battery power when the computer is connected to external power with an approved AC adapter or an optional docking/expansion device. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. Connect the computer to external power under any of the following conditions:

WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard an aircraft. When charging or calibrating a battery When installing or modifying system software When writing information to a disc (select models only) When running Disk Defragmenter on computers with internal hard drives When performing a backup or recovery When you connect the computer to external power:

The battery begins to charge. The display brightness increases. The Power Meter icon in the notification area changes appearance. When you disconnect external power, the following events occur:

The computer switches to battery power. The display brightness automatically decreases to save battery life. The Power Meter icon in the notification area changes appearance. 46 Chapter 6 Managing power HP CoolSense HP CoolSense automatically detects when the computer is not in a stationary position and adjusts performance and fan settings to keep the surface temperature of your computer at the optimum level of comfort. When HP CoolSense is off, the position of the computer is not detected and the performance and fan options remain at the factory setting. As a result, the surface temperature of the computer may be higher than it would be with HP CoolSense on. To turn CoolSense off or on, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > HP CoolSense. Select On or Off. Refreshing your software content with Intel Smart Connect Technology (select models only) When the computer is in the Sleep state, Intel Smart Connect Technology periodically causes the computer to exit Sleep. Smart Connect then updates the content for certain open applications and reinitiates Sleep. As a result, your work is immediately available to you as soon as you exit Sleep. You do not have to wait while updates are downloaded. To enable this feature or manually adjust the settings, select Start > All Programs > Intel >

Intel Smart Connect Technology. For additional information and a list of supported applications, see the software Help. Shutting down the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and computer. Shut down the computer under any of the following conditions:

When you need to replace the battery or access components inside the computer When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB or video port When the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period Although you can shut down the computer with the power button, the recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command:

NOTE:

Hibernation before shutdown is possible. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, you must first exit Sleep or 1. 2. Save your work and close all open programs. Select Start > Shut down. HP CoolSense 47 If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, and then click the Shut down icon on the display. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power. On models with a user-replaceable battery, remove the battery. 48 Chapter 6 Managing power 7 Managing and sharing information Drives are digital storage devices or solid-state drives that help you store, manage, share, and access information. Your computer has an internal hard drive that stores your computer's software, operating system, as well as providing storage for all of your personal files. Some computers also have a built-in optical drive that allows you to read or write to a CD, DVD, or (on select models) Blu-

ray Disc (BD), to play and record audio and video. For added capacity or functionality, connect an external drive (purchased separately), such as an optical drive or hard drive, or insert a digital storage card to import information directly from your phone or camera. A Universal Serial Bus (USB) flash drive, connected to the Universal Serial Bus

(USB) port on your computer, also allows quick data transfer. Some devices use the computer's power to run; others have their own power source. Some devices come with software that must be installed. NOTE: For information about connecting external wireless devices, see Connecting to a network on page 17. NOTE: For more information about required software and drivers, or to learn which computer port to use, see the manufacturer's instructions. Using a USB device Most computers have more than one USB port, because this versatile interface allows you to connect to numerous kinds of external devices to your computer, such as a USB keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner, or USB hub. Your computer may have more than one type of USB port. See Getting to know your computer on page 4 for the types of USB ports you have on this computer. Be sure to purchase devices that are compatible with your computer. Type USB 2.0 USB 3.0 Description Transfers data at 60 MB/s. Transfers data at 640 MB/s. USB 3.0 ports, also known as SuperSpeed ports, are also compatible with USB 1.0 and 2.0 devices. NOTE: A powered/charging USB port allows certain USB devices to charge while they are plugged into this port. Standard USB ports will not charge all USB devices or will charge using a low current. In addition, some USB devices cannot operate unless they are connected to a powered port. Using a USB device 49 Connecting a USB device CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to a USB connector, use minimal force to connect the device. Connect the USB cable for the device to the USB port. NOTE: The USB port on your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. A sound indicates that the device has been detected. NOTE: The first time you connect a USB device, a message in the notification area lets you know that the device is recognized by the computer. Removing a USB device CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to a USB connector, do not pull on the cable to remove the USB device. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of loss of information or an unresponsive system, use the following procedure to safely remove the USB device. 1. To remove a USB device, save your information and close all programs associated with the device. 2. Click the remove hardware icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Remove the device. Connecting a powered USB device CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the equipment when connecting a powered device, be sure that the device is turned off and its AC power cord is unplugged. 1. Connect the device to the computer. 2. 3. Plug the device power cord into a grounded AC outlet. Turn on the device. 50 Chapter 7 Managing and sharing information To disconnect an unpowered external device, stop the device, and then disconnect it from the computer. To disconnect a powered external device, turn off the device, disconnect it from the computer, and then unplug the AC power cord. Inserting and removing a digital storage card To insert a digital storage card:

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the digital card connectors, use minimal force to insert a digital card. 1. Hold the card label-side up, with the connectors facing the computer. 2. Insert the card into the digital storage slot, and then press in on the card until it is firmly seated. A sound indicates that the device has been detected, and a menu of options displays. To remove a digital storage card:

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of loss of data or an unresponsive system, use the following procedure to safely remove the digital card. 1. Save your information and close all programs associated with the digital card. 2. Click the remove hardware icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Then follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Press in on the card (1), and then remove it from the slot (2). Inserting and removing a digital storage card 51 NOTE:

If the card is not ejected, pull the card out of the slot. Using optical drives An optical disc drive uses laser light to read or store large amounts of information. Some drives can only read information, but others can also write (burn) information onto a blank disc. Use these tips for best performance of your optical drive:

When the battery is the only source of power, be sure the battery is sufficiently charged before writing to media. Do not type on the keyboard or move the computer while an optical drive is writing to a disc. The write process is sensitive to vibration. Make sure you have installed the latest software updates for the drive. If the disc you are using is not clean, wipe it with a dry, lint-free, soft cloth. Your computer may include an optical drive that supports one or more of the following disc technologies:

CDA compact disc stores data that is read by a laser from the optical disc drive. The following CD formats are available:

CD-Recordable (CD-R), which allows the computer to read information and to record information one time on the CD. Once the information is recorded on the CD-R disc, it cannot be changed or erased; it is permanent. CD-Re-Writable (CD-RW), which allows you to read information and record information many times to the CD. Information on the CD can be erased. DVDA digital video disc is a high-capacity optical disc. It can store more information than a CD. A double-sided DVD can store up to 17 GB. The following DVD formats are available:

DVD-Recordable (DVD-R or DVD+R), which allow the computer to read information and to record information one time on the DVD. After the information is recorded on the disc, it cannot be changed or erased; it is permanent. The DVDs can be used in DVDR drives. DVD-Re-Writable (DVD-RW or DVD+RW), which allow to read information and record information many times to the disc. Information on the disc can be erased. The DVDs can be used in DVDR drives. BDa Blu-ray Disc holds more information than the other optical discs and they can used to record, rewrite, and play back high-definition (HD) video. Note the following when using BDs:

CyberLink PowerDVD is installed on the computer to play BD movies. Playing most BD movie titles on an external display requires an HDMI digital connection. The computer can support up to 1080p resolution on an external display, which requires a 1080p-

capable HDTV or monitor. Attempting to play a BD movie simultaneously on both the internal and an external display may cause an error, so choose only one. 52 Chapter 7 Managing and sharing information For copy protection purposes, Advanced Access Content System (AACS) keys are integrated into the computer. AACS keys require occasional renewal to support playback of new BD movie releases. The CyberLink PowerDVD program will request an update to continue playback when such a BD movie release is inserted in the drive. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the update. If lines appear on the display when viewing a BD, they may be caused by interference from the wireless network. To resolve the issue, close any open applications and turn off your wireless feature. Inserting an optical disc Turn on the computer. 1. 2. 3. Press the release button (1) on the drive bezel to release the disc tray. Pull out the tray (2). 4. Hold the disc by the edges to avoid touching the flat surfaces and position the disc label-side up over the tray spindle. NOTE:

If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully to position it over the spindle. 5. Gently press the disc (3) down onto the tray spindle until the disc snaps into place. 6. Close the disc tray. NOTE: After you insert a disc, a short pause is normal. If you have not selected a media player, an AutoPlay dialog box opens. It prompts you to select how you want to use the media content. Removing an optical disc 1. Press the release button (1) on the drive bezel to release the disc tray, and then gently pull out the tray (2) until it stops. Using optical drives 53 2. Remove the disc (3) from the tray by gently pressing down on the spindle while lifting the outer edges of the disc. Hold the disc by the edges and avoid touching the flat surfaces. NOTE:

If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully as you remove it. 3. Close the disc tray and place the disc in a protective case. If the disc tray does not open normally, see Disc drive problems on page 82. Sharing drives on the network You can access software and data and install applications by sharing drives connected to another computer in your network. NOTE: Some discs, such as DVD movies and games, may be copy-protected and therefore unusable through DVD or CD drive sharing. To share on the same network:

1. From the computer you are sharing, select Start > Computer. 2. Right-click what you want to share, and click Properties. 3. 4. 5. Select the Sharing tab, and then select Advanced Sharing. Select the Share this folder check box. Type a name in the Share name text box. 6. Click Apply, and then click OK. 7. To view the shared drive:

Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 54 Chapter 7 Managing and sharing information 8 Maintaining your computer It is important to perform regular maintenance to keep your computer in optimal condition. This chapter provides information about improving the performance of your computer by running tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup and by replacing a hard drive or adding memory. It also provides information about updating your programs and drivers, instructions for cleaning your computer, and tips for traveling with your computer. Improving performance Everyone wants a fast computer and by performing regular maintenance tasks, using tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup, you can drastically improve the performance of your computer. Also, as your computer gets older, you might consider installing larger drives and adding more memory. Handling drives Observe these precautions when handling drives:

Before removing or installing a drive, shut down the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off, in the Sleep state, or in Hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. Before handling a drive, discharge static electricity by touching the unpainted metal surface of the drive. Do not touch the connector pins on a removable drive or on the computer. Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive into a drive bay. When the battery is the only source of power, be sure that the battery is sufficiently charged before writing to media. If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. Remove media from a drive before removing the drive from the drive bay, or traveling with, shipping, or storing a drive. Improving performance 55 Do not type on the keyboard or move the computer while an optical drive is writing to a disc. The write process is sensitive to vibration. Before you move a computer that is connected to an external hard drive, initiate Sleep and allow the screen to clear, or properly disconnect the external hard drive. Replacing a hard drive CAUTION: Drives are fragile computer components that must be handled with care. Do not drop a drive, place items on it, or expose it to liquids, or temperature or humidity extremes. See Handling drives on page 55 for specific precautions when handling drives. CAUTION: To prevent information loss or an unresponsive system:

Before removing or installing a drive, shut down the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off, in the Sleep state, or in Hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 1. Save your work and shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 4. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. 5. Remove the battery from the computer. Remove the hard drive:

1. 2. Loosen the service door screw (1), and then slide the battery release latch (2) until the service door is released. Slide the door out of the slot (3), and then lift up and remove the door (4). 3. Remove the 4 screws (1) from the hard drive. 4. Disconnect the hard drive cable (2) from the system board. 56 Chapter 8 Maintaining your computer 5. Lift the hard drive (3) out of the hard drive bay. To install a hard drive, reverse this procedure. Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select models only) HP 3D DriveGuard protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under either of the following conditions:

You drop the computer. You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power. A short time after the end of one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Because solid-state drives (SSD) lack moving parts, HP 3D DriveGuard is unnecessary. NOTE: Hard drives in the primary hard drive bay are protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. Hard drives connected to USB ports are not covered by HP 3D DriveGuard. For more information, see the HP 3D DriveGuard software Help. Using Disk Defragmenter As you use your computer over time, the files on the hard drive become fragmented. A fragmented drive means data on your drive is not contiguous (sequential) and, because of this, the hard drive works harder to locate files, thus slowing down the computer. Disk Defragmenter consolidates (or physically reorganizes) the fragmented files and folders on the hard drive so that the system can run more efficiently. Improving performance 57 NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. After you start Disk Defragmenter, it works without supervision. However, depending on the size of your hard drive and the number of fragmented files, Disk Defragmenter may take more than an hour to complete. HP recommends defragmenting your hard drive at least once a month. You may set Disk Defragmenter to run on a monthly schedule, but you can defragment your computer manually at any time. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. Connect the computer to AC power. 2. 3. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Defragmenter. Follow the on-screen instructions. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Disk Cleanup searches the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. 2. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Cleanup. Follow the on-screen instructions. Adding or replacing memory modules Adding memory can help improve your computer's performance. Your computer is like your physical work area. The hard drive is the filing cabinet where you store your work and the memory is the desk where you work. When your memory isnt big enough to hold all your work easily, like a desk overflowing with work, your productivity slows down. A great solution to improve performance is to expand the amount of memory you have in your computer. The computer has two memory module slots. The memory module slots are located on the bottom of the computer under the service door. The memory capacity of the computer can be upgraded by adding a memory module or replacing the existing memory module in one of the memory module slots. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock and damage to the equipment, unplug the power cord and remove all batteries before installing a memory module. CAUTION: Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage electronic components. Before beginning any procedure, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. NOTE: To use a dual-channel configuration with a second memory module, be sure that both memory modules are identical. To add or replace a memory module:

58 Chapter 8 Maintaining your computer CAUTION: To prevent information loss or an unresponsive system:

Shut down the computer before adding or replacing memory modules. Do not remove a memory module while the computer is on, in the Sleep state, or in Hibernation. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on by pressing the power button. Then shut down the computer through the operating system. 1. Save your work and shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 4. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. 5. Remove the battery from the computer. 6. Remove the service door from the computer. 7. If you are replacing a memory module, remove the existing memory module:

a. Pull away the retention clips (1) on each side of the memory module. The memory module tilts up. b. Grasp the edge of the memory module (2), and then gently pull the module out of the memory module slot. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module. To protect a memory module after removal, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. Improving performance 59 8. Insert a new memory module:

CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module. a. Align the notched edge (1) of the memory module with the tab in the memory module slot. b. With the memory module at a 45-degree angle from the surface of the memory module compartment, press the module into the memory module slot (2) until it is seated. c. Gently press the memory module (3) down, applying pressure to both the left and right edges of the module, until the retention clips snap into place. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, be sure that you do not bend the module. 9. Replace the service door. 10. Replace the battery. 11. Turn the computer right-side up, and then reconnect external power and external devices. 12. Turn on the computer. 60 Chapter 8 Maintaining your computer Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis to the latest versions. Updates can resolve issues and bring new features and options to your computer. Technology is always changing, and updating programs and drivers allows your computer to run the latest technology available. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you would not be getting the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic update notifications when they become available. Cleaning your computer Cleaning your computer and external devices helps keep them in good working condition. If you don't clean your computer, dust and dirt particles can build up. CAUTION: Avoid using the following cleaning products to clean your computer:

Strong solvents, such as alcohol, acetone, ammonium chloride, methylene chloride, and hydrocarbons, which can permanently damage the surface of the computer. Cleaning the display, sides, and cover Gently wipe the display using a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner. Allow the display to dry before closing the computer cover. Use a pre-moistened germicidal wipe to clean the sides and cover. Fibrous materials, such as paper towels, can scratch the computer. NOTE: When cleaning the cover of the computer, use a circular motion to aid in removing dirt and debris. Cleaning the TouchPad and keyboard CAUTION: Never allow liquids to drip between the keys on the keyboard, even when you are cleaning the computer. This can permanently damage internal components. To clean and disinfect the TouchPad and keyboard, use a soft microfiber cloth or a static-free cloth without oil (such as a chamois cloth) moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner or use an acceptable germicidal disposable wipe. To prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles from the keyboard, use a can of compressed air with a straw extension. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Updating programs and drivers 61 Traveling with or shipping your computer If you have to travel with or ship your computer, here are some tips to keep in mind to keep your equipment safe. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Back up your information to an external drive. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as digital storage cards, from the computer. Turn off, and then disconnect all external devices. Remove any media from the drive before removing the drive from a drive bay. CAUTION: Perform this action before shipping, storing, or traveling with a drive. This will help reduce the risk of damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information. Shut down the computer. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you are allowed to use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. If the computer has a wireless device installed, the use of these devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply onboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a particular device, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 62 Chapter 8 Maintaining your computer 9 Securing your computer and information Computer security is essential for protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your information. Standard security solutions provided by the Windows operating system, HP applications, the non-Windows Setup Utility (BIOS), and other third-party software can help protect your computer from a variety of risks, such as viruses, worms, and other types of malicious code. IMPORTANT: Some security features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Computer risk Unauthorized use of the computer Computer viruses Unauthorized access to data Unauthorized access to Setup Utility (BIOS) settings and other system identification information Security feature Power-on password Fingerprint reader Antivirus software Firewall software Administrator password Ongoing or future threats to the computer Software updates Unauthorized access to a Windows user account User password Unauthorized removal of the computer Security cable lock Locating your security software HP Security Assistant (select models only) provides a starting location for quick access to a collection of security software applications that are organized by task. Instead of searching for each application through the Start menu and Control Panel, HP Security Assistant allows you to access the applications for the following security tasks:

Setting up Internet and antivirus security. Backing up and recovering files. Managing passwords, user accounts, and parental controls. Maintaining your computer and installing the latest HP and Windows updates. Setting up the fingerprint reader (select models only). Locating your security software 63 To open HP Security Assistant, select Start > All Programs > Security and Protection > HP Security Assistant. Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information and to protect online transactions. Several types of passwords can be set. For example, when you set up your computer for the first time, you were asked to create a user password to secure your computer. Additional passwords can be set in Windows or in the HP Setup Utility (BIOS) that is preinstalled on your computer. You may find it helpful to use the same password for a Setup Utility (BIOS) feature and for a Windows security feature. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

To reduce the risk of being locked out of the computer, record each password and store it in a secure place away from the computer. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Change your passwords at least every three months. An ideal password is long and has letters, punctuation, symbols, and numbers. Before you send your computer for service, back up your files, delete confidential files, and then remove all password settings. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords, select Start

> Help and Support. Setting Windows passwords Password User password Function Protects access to a Windows user account. You may also set up your computer to require the user password to exit Sleep or Hibernation. See Setting password protection on wakeup on page 42 for more information. Administrator password Protects administrator-level access to computer contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility (BIOS) contents. 64 Chapter 9 Securing your computer and information Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords Password Administrator password Power-on password Function Must be entered each time you access Setup Utility

(BIOS). If you forget your administrator password, you cannot access Setup Utility (BIOS). NOTE: The administrator password can be used in place of the power-on password. NOTE: Your administrator password is not interchangeable with an administrator password set in Windows, nor is it displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. If you enter the power-on password at the first NOTE:

password check before the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed, you must enter the administrator password to access Setup Utility (BIOS). Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer, or exit Hibernation. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer, or exit Hibernation. NOTE: The administrator password can be used in place of the power-on password. NOTE: A power-on password is not displayed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. To set, change, or delete an administrator or power-on password in Setup Utility (BIOS):

1. Open Setup Utility (BIOS) by turning on or restarting the computer. While the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen, press esc. 2. Use the arrow keys and follow the on-screen instructions. When the Startup Menu is displayed, press f10. 3. Use the arrow keys to select Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Using the fingerprint reader Integrated fingerprint readers are available on select computer models. In order to use the fingerprint reader, you must set up a user account and password on the computer and then register one or more fingerprints using HP SimplePass software. For the location of the fingerprint reader on your computer, see Getting to know your computer on page 4. Using the fingerprint reader 65 Using HP SimplePass HP SimplePass provides an easy-to-use interface to help secure your computer and simplify the way you log on to your computer and password-protected websites. Use a registered fingerprint to:

Log on to Windows. Access websites and other programs that require a logon. Set up a single sign-on service that allows you to use a registered fingerprint to create credentials for any application that requires a user name and password. Set up protected accounts on the computer for multiple users. For more information, see the HP SimplePass software Help. Registering fingerprints To register one or more fingerprints with HP SimplePass:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Security and Protection > HP SimplePass. 2. Have you found your fingerprint sensor?Click Yes. 3. Are you ready to enroll?Click Yes. 4. Select a finger. 5. Create Windows passwordEnter your password and confirm your password. 6. 7. Swipe your finger 3 times. A green circle is displayed on the finger if it is registered successfully. Otherwise, a warning message is displayed. Select another finger or click > to continue. 8. Click Register now or Register later. Repeat these steps for each additional user. Using your registered fingerprint to log on to Windows To log on to Windows using your fingerprint:

1. 2. After you register your fingerprints, restart Windows. Swipe any of your registered fingerprints to log on to Windows. Using Internet security software When you use your computer to access email, a network, or the Internet, you potentially expose your computer to computer viruses, spyware, and other online threats. To help protect your computer, Internet security software that includes antivirus and firewall features may be preinstalled on your computer as a trial offer. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses and other security risks, security software must be kept up to date. It is strongly recommended that you upgrade the security software trial offer or purchase the software of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. 66 Chapter 9 Securing your computer and information Using antivirus software Computer viruses can disable programs, utilities, or the operating system, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. For more information about computer viruses, type viruses in the Search box in Help and Support. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be software you install on your computer and/or network, or it can be a combination of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. Installing software updates HP, Microsoft Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. For more information, see Updating programs and drivers on page 61. Installing Windows security updates Updates to the operating system and other software may have become available after the computer left the factory. Microsoft sends out alerts regarding critical updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all critical updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. To be sure that all available updates are installed on the computer, observe these guidelines:

Run Windows Update as soon as possible after you set up your computer. Select Start > All Programs > Windows Update. Run Windows Update monthly thereafter. Obtain updates to Windows and other Microsoft programs, as they are released, from the Microsoft website and through the updates link in Help and Support. Installing HP and third-party software updates HP recommends that you regularly update the software and drivers that were originally installed on your computer. To download the latest versions, go to http://www.hp.com/support. At this location, you can also register to receive automatic update notifications when they become available. Installing software updates 67 If you have installed third-party software after you purchased your computer, regularly update the software. Software companies provide software updates to their products to correct security problems and improve functionality of the software. Securing your wireless network When you set up your wireless network, always enable security features. For more information, see Protecting your WLAN on page 20. Backing up your software applications and information Regularly back up your software applications and information to protect them from being permanently lost or damaged through a virus attack or a software or hardware failure. For more information, see Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 72. Using an optional security cable lock A security cable lock, which is purchased separately, is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. Security cable locks are only one of several methods that should be employed as part of a complete security solution to help maximize theft protection. The security cable slot on your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. For the location of the security cable slot on your computer, see Getting to know your computer on page 4. 1. 2. 3. Loop the security cable lock around a secured object. Insert the key (1) into the security cable lock (2). Insert the security cable lock into the security cable slot on the computer (3), and then lock the security cable lock with the key. 4. Remove the key and keep it in a safe place. 68 Chapter 9 Securing your computer and information 10 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and System Diagnostics Setup Utility, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Setup Utility (BIOS) includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) To start Setup Utility (BIOS), follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Setup Utility (BIOS). Information about how to navigate in Setup Utility (BIOS) is located at the bottom of the screen. NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To determine whether available BIOS updates contain later BIOS versions than those currently installed on the computer, you need to know the version of the system BIOS currently installed. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) 69 BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be displayed by pressing fn+esc (if you are already in Windows) or by using Setup Utility (BIOS). 1. Start Setup Utility (BIOS). 2. Use the arrow keys to select Main. 3. To exit Setup Utility (BIOS) without saving your changes, use the tab key and the arrow keys to select Exit > Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep or Hibernation. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. 1. 2. 3. Select Start > Help and Support > Maintain. Follow the on-screen instructions to identify your computer and access the BIOS update you want to download. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. b. Identify the BIOS update that is later than the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. NOTE:

installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are displayed, follow these steps:

1. Open Windows Explorer by selecting Start > Computer. 2. Double-click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. 70 Chapter 10 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and System Diagnostics NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Using System Diagnostics System Diagnostics allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine if the computer hardware is functioning properly. To start System Diagnostics:

1. Turn on or restart the computer. While the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen, press esc. When the Startup Menu is displayed, press f2. 2. Click the diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostics test while it is running, press esc. Using System Diagnostics 71 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering Your computer includes tools provided by the operating system and HP to help you safeguard your information and retrieve it if ever needed. Creating backups 1. Use HP Recovery Manager to create recovery media immediately after you set up the working computer. 2. 3. As you add hardware and software programs, create system restore points. As you add photos, video, music, and other personal files, create a backup of your system and personal information. Creating recovery media to recover the original system After you successfully set up the computer, you should create recovery discs or a recovery flash drive using HP Recovery Manager. You will need these recovery discs or recovery flash drive to perform a system recovery should the hard drive become corrupted. A system recovery reinstalls the original operating system, and then configures the settings for the default programs. What you need to know Only one set of recovery media can be created. Handle these recovery tools carefully, and keep them in a safe place. HP Recovery Manager examines the computer and determines the required storage capacity for the flash drive or the number of blank DVD discs that will be required. Use DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL discs or a flash drive. Do not use rewriteable discs such as CDRW, DVDRW, double-layer DVDRW, and BD-RE (rewritable Blu-ray) discs; they are not compatible with HP Recovery Manager software. If your computer does not include an integrated optical drive, you can use an optional external optical drive (purchased separately) to create recovery discs, or you can obtain recovery discs for your computer from the HP website. If you use an external optical drive, it must be connected directly to a USB port on the computer, not to a USB port on an external device, such as a USB hub. Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you begin creating the recovery media. The creation process can take up to an hour or more. Do not interrupt the creation process. 72 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering Store the recovery media in a safe location, separate from the computer. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating the recovery media. The next time you open HP Recovery Manager, you will be prompted to continue the process. Creating the recovery media 1. Select Start and type recovery in the search field. Select Recovery Manager from the list. Allow the action to continue, if prompted. 2. Click Recovery Media Creation. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to continue. To recover, see Recovering the original system using HP Recovery Manager on page 76. Creating system restore points A system restore point is a snapshot of certain hard drive contents saved by Windows System Restore at a specific time. A restore point contains information such as registry settings that Windows uses. Restoring to a previous restore point allows you to reverse changes that have been made to the system since the restore point was created. Restoring to an earlier system restore point does not affect data files saved or emails created since the last restore point, but it does affect software you may have installed. For example, if you download a photo from a digital camera and then restore the computer to the state it was on the previous day, the photo remains on the computer. However, if you install photo viewing software and then restore your computer to the state it was on the previous day, the software will be uninstalled, and you won't be able to use it. What you need to know If you restore to a restore point and then change your mind, you can undo the restoration. You should create system restore points:

Before you add or change software or hardware Periodically, whenever the computer is running normally System Restore also saves shadow copies of files that have been changed since the last restore point was created. For more information about using shadow copies to restore, see Help and Support. Creating a system restore point 1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > System. In the left pane, click System Protection. 3. Click the System Protection tab. 4. Click Create, and follow the on-screen instructions. To restore, see Restoring to a previous system restore point on page 76. Creating backups 73 Backing up system and personal information Your computer stores information that is important to you, such as files, emails, and photos, and you will want to keep that information even if you download a virus or the system stops working properly. How completely you are able to recover your files depends on how recent your backup is. As you add new software and data files, you should create backups on a regular basis. Tips for a successful backup Number backup discs before inserting them into the optical drive. Store personal files in the Documents, Music, Pictures, and Videos libraries, and back up these folders periodically. Save customized settings in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your settings. The screen shot can be a time-saver if you have to re-enter your preferences. To create a screen shot:

1. Display the screen you want to save. 2. Copy the screen image:

To copy only the active window, press alt+prt sc. To copy the entire screen, press prt sc. 3. Open a word-processing document or graphics editing program, and then select Edit > Paste. The screen image is added to the document. 4. Save and print the document. What you need to know You can back up your information to an optional external hard drive, a flash drive, a network drive, or discs. Connect the computer to AC power during backups. Allow enough time for the backup. Depending on files sizes, it may take more than an hour. Verify the amount of free space on your backup storage device before you back up. You should back up:

Before adding or changing software or hardware. Before the computer is repaired or restored. On a regular schedule to be sure you have recent copies of personal information. After you add many filesfor example, if you saved videos from a birthday party. Before using antivirus software to remove a malicious program. After adding information that is hard to replace, such as pictures, videos, music, project files, or data records. 74 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering Creating a backup using Windows Backup and Restore Windows allows you to back up files using Windows Backup and Restore. You can select the level you want to back up, from individual folders to drives. The backups are compressed to save space. To back up:

1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Backup and Restore. Follow the on-screen instructions to schedule and create a backup. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of the computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. See Help and Support for more information. To restore, see Restoring specific files using Windows Backup and Restore on page 76. Creating backups 75 Restore and recovery Restoring to a previous system restore point Sometimes installing a software program causes your computer or Windows to behave unpredictably. Usually uninstalling the software fixes the problems. If uninstalling does not fix the problems, you can restore the computer to a previous system restore point (created at an earlier date and time). To restore to a previous system restore point, when the computer was running correctly:

1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > System. In the left pane, click System Protection. 3. Click the System Protection tab. 4. Click System Restore, and follow the on-screen instructions. Restoring specific files If files are accidentally deleted from the hard disk and they can no longer be restored from the Recycle Bin, or if files become corrupt, restoring specific files is useful. Restoring specific files is also useful if you ever choose to recover the original system using HP Recovery Manager. You can only restore specific files that you have backed up before. Restoring specific files using Windows Backup and Restore Windows allows you to restore files that were backed up using Windows Backup and Restore:

1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Backup and Restore. Follow the on-screen instructions to restore your backup. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of the computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. See Help and Support for more information. Recovering the original system using HP Recovery Manager HP Recovery Manager software allows you to repair or recover the computer to its original factory state. What you need to know HP Recovery Manager recovers only software that was installed at the factory. For software not provided with this computer, you must either download the software from the manufacturer's website or reinstall the software from the disc provided by the manufacturer. A system recovery should be used as a final attempt to correct computer issues. If you have not already tried restore points (see Restoring to a previous system restore point on page 76) and partial restores (see Restoring specific files on page 76), try them before using HP Recovery Manager to recover your system. A system recovery must be performed if the computer hard drive fails or if all attempts to correct any functional computer issues fail. 76 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering If the recovery media do not work, you can obtain recovery discs for your system from the HP website. The Minimized Image Recovery option is recommended for advanced users only. All hardware-

related drivers and software are re-installed, but other software applications are not. Do not interrupt the process until it is complete, otherwise the recovery will fail. Recovering using HP Recovery partition (select models only) The HP Recovery partition (select models only), allows you to restore your system without the need for recovery discs or a recovery flash drive. This type of recovery can only be used if the hard drive is still working. To check for the presence of a recovery partition, select Start, right-click Computer then select Manage > Disk Management. If the recovery partition is present, a Recovery drive is listed in the window. NOTE: Recovery discs have been included if your computer did not ship with a recovery partition. 1. Access HP Recovery Manager in either of the following ways:

Select Start and type recovery in the search field. Select Recovery Manager from the list. or Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Then press f11 while the F11 (System Recovery) message is displayed on the screen. 2. Click System Recovery in the HP Recovery Manager window. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Recovering using the recovery media 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. If possible, back up all personal files. Insert the first recovery disc into the optical drive on your computer or an optional external optical drive, and then restart the computer. or Insert the recovery flash drive into a USB port on your computer, and then restart the computer. NOTE:

computer boot order. See Changing the computer boot order on page 78. If the computer does not automatically restart in HP Recovery Manager, change the Press f9 at system bootup. Select the optical drive or the flash drive. Follow the on-screen instructions. Restore and recovery 77 Changing the computer boot order To change the boot order for recovery discs:

1. Restart the computer. 2. 3. Press esc while the computer is restarting, and then press f9 for boot options. Select Internal CD/DVD ROM Drive from the boot options window. To change the boot order for a recovery flash drive:

1. Insert the flash drive into a USB port. 2. Restart the computer. 3. 4. Press esc while the computer is restarting, and then press f9 for boot options. Select the flash drive from the boot options window. 78 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering 12 Specifications Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100240 V, 5060 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. Operating voltage and current varies by platform. Input power Rating Operating voltage and current 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A 65 W 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65 W 19 V dc @ 4.74 A 90 W 19.5 V dc @ 4.62 A 90 W DC plug of external HP power supply NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. NOTE: The computer operating voltage and current can be found on the system regulatory label. Input power 79 Operating environment Factor Temperature Operating Nonoperating Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Metric U.S. 5C to 35C

-20C to 60C 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

41F to 95F

-4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Operating Nonoperating

-15 m to 3,048 m

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 40,000 ft 80 Chapter 12 Specifications 13 Troubleshooting and support 81 Troubleshooting Disc drive problems If the disc tray fails to open normally, follow these steps:

1. 2. Insert the end of a paper clip into the release access (1) in the front bezel of the drive. Press in gently on the paper clip until the tray is released, and then pull out the tray (2) until it stops. 3. Remove the disc (3) from the tray by gently pressing down on the spindle while lifting the outer edges of the disc. Hold the disc by the edges and avoid touching the flat surfaces. NOTE:

If the tray is not fully accessible, tilt the disc carefully as you remove it. 4. Close the disc tray and place the disc in a protective case. Wireless connection problems Some possible causes for wireless connection problems include the following:

Wireless device is not turned on. Wireless device is not installed correctly or has been disabled. Wireless device encountered interference from other devices. Wireless device or router hardware has failed. NOTE: Wireless networking devices are included with select computer models only. If wireless networking is not listed in the feature list on the side of the original computer package, you may add wireless networking capability to the computer by purchasing a wireless networking device. 82 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting and support Cannot connect to a WLAN If you have a problem connecting to a WLAN, confirm that the integrated WLAN device is turned on and properly installed on your computer. 1. 2. If the wireless light is off or amber, press the wireless button, wireless switch, or wireless key to turn the wireless device on. Then try connecting to the WLAN again. If you are still unable to connect, follow the steps below. 1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security. In the System area, click Device Manager. 3. Click the arrow next to Network adapters to expand the list and show all adapters. 4. Identify the WLAN device from the Network adapters list. The listing for a WLAN device may include the term wireless, wireless LAN, WLAN, or 802.11. If no WLAN device is listed, either your computer does not have an integrated WLAN device, or the driver for the WLAN device is not properly installed. For more information about troubleshooting WLANs, see the website links provided in Help and Support. Cannot connect to a preferred network You may not be able to connect to a preferred network because it is a security-enabled WLAN. You must have the security code to connect to this type of WLAN. See the next section for additional information. If entering a security code is not the problem, you may have a corrupted WLAN connection. Many times, Windows can automatically repair a corrupted WLAN connection. If there is a network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, right-click the icon, and then click Troubleshoot problems. Windows resets your network device and attempts to reconnect to one of the preferred networks. If there is no network status icon in the notification area, follow these steps:

1. Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. 2. Click Troubleshoot problems and select the network you wish to repair. Current network security codes are unavailable If you are prompted for a security code (or network key) or a name (SSID) when connecting to a WLAN, the network is protected by security. You must have the current codes to make a connection Troubleshooting 83 on a secure network. The SSID and security code are alphanumeric codes that you enter into your computer to identify your computer to the network. For a network connected to your personal wireless router, review the router user guide for instructions on setting up the same codes on both the router and the WLAN device. For a private network, such as a network in an office or at a public Internet chat room, contact the network administrator to obtain the codes, and then enter the codes when prompted to do so. Some networks change the SSID or network keys used in their routers or access points on a regular basis to improve security. You must change the corresponding code in your computer accordingly. If you are provided with new wireless network keys and SSID for a network, and if you have previously connected to that network, follow the steps below to connect to the network:

1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. In the left panel, click Manage wireless networks. A list showing the available WLANs is displayed. If you are in a hotspot where several WLANs are active, several will be displayed. 3. Select the network in the list, right-click the network, and then click Properties. NOTE:

that the router or access point is operating. If the network you want is not listed, check with the network administrator to be sure 4. Click the Security tab and enter the correct wireless encryption data into the Network security key box. 5. Click OK to save these settings. WLAN connection is very weak If the connection is very weak, or if your computer cannot make a connection to a WLAN, minimize interference from other devices, as follows:

Move your computer closer to the wireless router or access point. Temporarily disconnect wireless devices such as a microwave, cordless phone, or cellular phone to be sure that other wireless devices are not interfering. If the connection does not improve, try forcing the device to reestablish all connection values:

1. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center. In the left panel, click Manage wireless networks. A list showing the available WLANs is displayed. If you are in a hotspot where several WLANs are active, several will be displayed. 3. Click a network, and then click Remove. Cannot connect to the wireless router If you are trying to connect to the wireless router and are unsuccessful, reset the wireless router by removing power from the router for 10 to 15 seconds. 84 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting and support If the computer still cannot make a connection to a WLAN, restart the wireless router. For details, see the router manufacturer's instructions. Network status icon is not displayed If the network status icon is not displayed in the notification area after you configure the WLAN, the software driver is either missing or corrupted. A Windows Device not Found error message may also be displayed. The driver must be reinstalled. Get the latest version of the WLAN device software and drivers for your computer from the HP website at http://www.hp.com. If the WLAN device you are using was purchased separately, consult the manufacturer's website for the latest software. To get the latest version of the WLAN device software for your computer, follow these steps:

1. Open your Internet browser and go to http://www.hp.com/support. 2. Select your country or region. 3. Click the option for software and driver downloads, and then type your computer model number in the search box. 4. Press enter, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

website for the latest software. If the WLAN device you are using was purchased separately, consult the manufacturer's Audio problems To check the audio functions on your computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Sound. 2. When the Sound window opens, click the Sounds tab. Under Program Events, select any sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and click the Test button. You should hear sound through the speakers or through connected headphones. To check the recording functions on your computer, follow these steps:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Sound Recorder. 2. Click Start Recording and speak into the microphone. Save the file to your desktop. 3. Open a multimedia program and play back the sound. To confirm or change the audio settings on your computer, select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Sound. Power management problems Some possible causes for power management problems include the following:

Low battery levels AC adapter problems Troubleshooting 85 Resolving a low battery level Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect an AC adapter. Connect an optional docking or expansion device. Connect an optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP. Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Initiate Hibernation. Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the computer lacks sufficient power to exit Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. Replace the discharged user-replaceable battery with a charged battery, or connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. 2. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. Troubleshooting an AC adapter Test the AC adapter if the computer exhibits any of the following symptoms when it is connected to AC power:

The computer does not turn on. The display does not turn on. The power lights are off. To test the AC adapter:

1. Shut down the computer. 2. Remove the battery from the computer. 3. Connect the AC adapter to the computer, and then plug it into an AC outlet. 4. Turn on the computer. If the power lights turn on, the AC adapter is working properly. If the power lights remain off, check the connection from the AC adapter to the computer and the connection from the AC adapter to the AC outlet to make sure the connections are secure. If the connections are secure and the power lights remain off, the AC adapter is not functioning and should be replaced. Contact support for information about obtaining a replacement AC power adapter. 86 Chapter 13 Troubleshooting and support Contacting support If the information provided in this user guide or in Help and Support does not answer your questions, you can contact support. For U.S. product support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide product support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. Here you can:

Chat online with an HP technician. NOTE: When support chat is not available in a particular language, it is available in English. Email support. Find support telephone numbers. Locate an HP service center. Contacting support 87 14 Electrostatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, unplug it after being properly grounded and before removing a cover. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface of the component. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. If you need more information about static electricity or assistance with component removal or installation, contact support. 88 Chapter 14 Electrostatic Discharge Index A AC adapter 6 action keys decrease screen brightness Help and Support 32 identifying 13 increase screen brightness 32 next track or section 32 play, pause, resume 32 previous track or section 32 radiance backlight keyboard 32 32 switch screen image 32 volume down 32 volume mute 33 volume up 32 wireless 33 battery temperature 45 Beats Audio 13, 24, 25, 34 Beats Audio Control Panel 25 Beats Audio hot key 26 best practices 1 BIOS determining version 69 downloading an update 70 updating 69 Bluetooth device 17, 21 Bluetooth label 16 boot order changing 78 buttons left TouchPad 9, 36 optical drive eject 5 power 12 right TouchPad 9, 36 TouchPad on/off 9 airport security devices 55 antivirus software, using 67 audio functions, checking 26 audio-out (headphone) jack/audio-

in (microphone) jack 7, 24 C cables USB 50 B b key, identifying 13, 24 backing up software and information 68 backups 72 bass settings hot key 34 battery conserving power 45 disposing 46 replacing 46 storing 45 battery bay 14, 16 battery information, finding 45 battery power 44 battery release latch 14 caps lock light, identifying 10 caring for your computer 61 Certificate of Authenticity label 16 checking audio functions 26 cleaning your computer 61 components bottom 14 display 8 front 4 left side 7 right side 5 top 9 computer, traveling 45 configuring audio for HDMI 28 connecting to a WLAN 21 connector, power 6 conservation, power 45 corporate WLAN connection 21 critical battery level 45 CyberLink PowerDVD 29 D deleted files restoring 76 digital card inserting 51 Digital Media Slot, identifying 4 Disk Cleanup software 58 Disk Defragmenter software 57 drive media 41 E electrostatic discharge 88 esc key, identifying 13 external AC power, using 46 external devices 50 external monitor port 7, 27 external monitor port, identifying 24 F fingerprint reader using 65 fingerprint reader light 11 Fingerprint reader, identifying 12 fingerprints, registering 66 firewall software 67 flicking TouchPad gesture 40 fn key, identifying 13, 24, 34 fun things to do 2 H hard drive HP 3D DriveGuard 57 hard drive bay, identifying 15 Index 89 hard drive light 5 HDMI configuring audio 28 HDMI port, connecting 27 HDMI port, identifying 7, 24 Hibernation exiting 42 initiated during critical battery level 45 initiating 42 high-definition devices, connecting 27, 29 hot keys K keyboard backlight action key, identifying 32 keyboard hot keys, identifying 34 keypad, integrated numeric 13 keys action 13 b 13, 24 esc 13 fn 13, 24 num lock 13 Windows applications 13 Windows logo 13 bass settings 34 description 34 display system information 34 using 34 L labels HP 3D DriveGuard 57 HP and third-party software updates, installing 67 HP Connection Manager software 18 HP Recovery Manager 76 hubs 49 I input power 79 installing critical security updates 67 optional security cable lock 68 integrated numeric keypad, identifying 13, 35 integrated webcam light, identifying 8, 24 Intel Wireless Display 29 internal microphones, identifying Bluetooth 16 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 16 regulatory 16 service 16 wireless certification 16 WLAN 16 latch, battery release 14 lights AC adapter 6 caps lock 10 fingerprint reader 11 hard drive 5 mute 10 optical drive 5 power 5, 10 RJ-45 (network) jack 7 TouchPad 9, 11, 36 webcam 8, 24 wireless 10 Internet connection setup 20 Internet security software, using M maintenance audio-out (headphone) jack/

audio-in (microphone) jack 7, 24 network 7 RJ-45 (network) 7 Disk Cleanup 58 Disk Defragmenter 57 memory module inserting 60 removing 59 replacing 58 memory module compartment, identifying 15 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 16 8, 23 66 J jacks 90 Index mouse, external setting preferences 30 mute light, identifying 10 N network jack, identifying 7 num lock key, identifying 13, 35 O operating environment 80 operating system Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label 16 Product Key 16 optical disc inserting 53 removing 53 optical drive compartment, identifying 15 optical drive eject button, identifying 5 optical drive light, identifying 5 optical drive, identifying 5, 24 optional external devices, using 50 original system recovery 76 P passwords Setup Utility (BIOS) 65 Windows 64 pinching TouchPad gesture 39 ports external monitor 7, 24, 27 HDMI 7, 24, 27 Intel Wireless Display 29 USB 2.0 5, 24 USB 3.0 5, 7, 24 VGA 27 power battery 44 conserving 45 power button, identifying 12 power connector, identifying 6 power lights, identifying 5, 10 power meter 43 PowerDVD 29 Product Key 16 product name and number, computer 16 public WLAN connection 21 R readable media 41 recovering from the recovery discs 77 recovering the original system 76 recovery 76 HP Recovery Manager 76 recovery discs 72 recovery media 72 recovery, system 76 regulatory information regulatory label 16 wireless certification labels 16 restore points 73 restoring the original system creating recovery media 72 RJ-45 (network) jack lights 7 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 7 rotating TouchPad gesture 40 S scrolling TouchPad gesture 39 security cable lock, installing 68 security cable slot, identifying 6 security, wireless 20 serial number, computer 16 service door 15 service label, computer 16 service labels setting password protection on locating 16 wakeup 42 setup of WLAN 20 Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords 65 shipping the computer 62 shutdown 47 Sleep exiting 42 initiating 42 slots Digital Media 4 security cable 6 software CyberLink PowerDVD 29 Disk Cleanup 58 Disk Defragmenter 57 HP Connection Manager 18 software updates, installing 67 speakers, identifying 12, 24 storing a battery 45 subwoofer, identifying 14, 24 supported discs 72 system information hot key 34 system recovery 76 system restore points 73 creating 73 T temperature 45 TouchPad buttons 9, 36 using 36 TouchPad gestures flicking 40 pinching 39 rotating 40 scrolling 39 zooming 39 TouchPad light 9, 11, 36 TouchPad on/off button 9, 36 TouchPad zone, identifying 9, 36 traveling with the computer 16, 45, 62 Troubleshooting and support 81 troubleshooting; AC adapter 86 troubleshooting; audio functions troubleshooting; disc drive 82 troubleshooting; low battery level 85 86 troubleshooting; power management 85 troubleshooting; wireless connection 82 turning off the computer 47 U unresponsive system 47 USB 2.0 port, identifying 5, 24 USB 3.0 port, identifying 5, 7, 24 USB cable, connecting 50 USB devices connecting 50 description 49 removing 50 USB hubs 49 USB ports, identifying 5, 7, 24 using external AC power 46 using passwords 64 using the power meter 43 V vents, identifying 7, 14 VGA port, connecting 27 video 26 W webcam 25 webcam light, identifying 8, 23 webcam, identifying 8, 23 Windows applications key, identifying 13 Windows Backup and Restore restoring files 76 Windows logo key, identifying 13 Windows passwords 64 Windows security updates, installing 67 Wireless Assistant software 17 wireless button 17 wireless certification label 16 wireless controls button 17 operating system 17 Wireless Assistant software 17 21 wireless light 10, 17 wireless module compartment, identifying 15 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 21 corporate WLAN connection equipment needed 20 functional range 21 public WLAN connection 21 security 20 using 18 wireless network, securing 68 WLAN antennas, identifying 8 WLAN device 16, 18 WLAN label 16 writable media 41 Z zooming TouchPad gesture 39 Index 91

Lenovo IdeaPad Y480/ Y580 User Guide V1.0 L e n o v o C h n a i New World. New Thinking.TM www.lenovo.com 2 0 1 2 V1.0_en-US Read the safety notices and important tips in the included manuals before using your computer. Notes Before using the product, be sure to read Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide first. Some instructions in this guide may assume that you are using Windows 7. If you are using other Windows operating system, some operations may be slightly different. If you are using other operating systems, some operations may not apply to you. The features described in this guide are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer and/or your computer may include features that are not described in this user guide. The illustrations used in this manual are for Lenovo IdeaPad Y580 unless otherwise stated. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product. Regulatory Notice To refer to it, go to http://consumersupport.lenovo.com/ and click User guides and manuals. First Edition (February 2012) Copyright Lenovo 2012. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Contents Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer .......................................................1 Top view .........................................................1 Left-side view ................................................4 Right-side view..............................................5 Front view ......................................................6 Bottom view ...................................................7 Chapter 2. Learning the basics ...................9 First use...........................................................9 Using AC adapter and battery ..................11 Using the touchpad.....................................12 Using the keyboard.....................................13 Connecting external devices......................16 Special keys and buttons............................19 System status indicators.............................21 Securing your computer.............................22 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet ..... 23 Wired connection ........................................ 23 Wireless connection .................................... 24 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system ......... 25 OneKey Rescue system .............................. 25 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting...................... 27 Frequently asked questions....................... 27 Troubleshooting .......................................... 29 Appendix. CRU instructions..................... 33 Replacing the battery.................................. 33 Replacing the hard disk drive................... 34 Replacing memory...................................... 37 Removing the optical drive ....................... 40 Trademarks ................................................ 41 i Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Top view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Y480 f g h i ab b c d e j Note: The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product.

Attention:

Do NOT open the display panel beyond 130 degrees. When closing the display panel, be careful NOT to leave pens or any other objects in between the display panel and the keyboard. Otherwise, the display panel may be damaged. 1 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer

Y580 f g h i ab b c d e j k Integrated camera Use the camera for video communication. Built-in microphone The built-in microphone (with noise reduction) can be used for video conferencing, voice narration, or simple audio recordings. Wireless module antennas The built-in antennas ensure optimal reception of wireless radio. Computer display The LCD display provides brilliant visual output. JBL speakers The stereo speakers provide rich and powerful sound. a b c d e 2 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer f g Power button Press this button to turn on the computer. OneKey Rescue system button Press this button to start OneKey Rescue system when the computer is powered off. Note: For details, see OneKey Rescue system on page 25. h OneKey Theater button Touch this button to select a preferred scenario mode. Note: For details, see OneKey Theater button on page 20. i Volume button Mute/Unmute. j Touchpad The touchpad functions as a conventional mouse. Note: For details, see Using the touchpad on page 12. k Numeric keypad

(Y580) For details, see Using the keyboard on page 13. 3 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Left-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a b c ed f a Kensington slot Attach a security lock (not supplied) here. Note: For details, see Attaching a security lock (not supplied) on page 22. b Fan louvers Dissipate internal heat. Note: Make sure that none of the fan louvers are blocked or else overheating of the computer may occur. VGA port RJ-45 port Connects to external display devices. This port connects the computer to an Ethernet network. Note: For details, see Wired connection on page 23. HDMI port USB port Connects to devices with HDMI input such as a TV or a display. Connects to USB devices. Notes:

The blue port supports USB 3.0. For details, see Connecting USB devices on page 17. c d e f 4 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Right-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Y480

Y580 a b c e c f dcba e c f a Headphone jack Connects to external headphones.

Attention:

Listening to music at high volume over extended periods of time may damage your hearing. b c Microphone jack Connects to external microphones. USB port Connects to USB devices. Notes:

The blue port supports USB 3.0. For details, see Connecting USB devices on page 17. d TV-in jack

(on select models) Attach an external TV antenna here. e Optical drive Reads/Burns optical disks. f AC power adapter jack Connect the AC adapter here. Note: For details, see Using AC adapter and battery on page 11. 5 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Front view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a b a System status indicators For details, see System status indicators on page 21. b Memory card slot Insert memory cards (not supplied) here. Note: For details, see Using memory cards (not supplied) on page 16. 6 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Bottom view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Y480 a b c d 7 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer

Y580 a b c d Battery latch - spring loaded The spring-loaded battery latch keeps the battery pack secured in place. Battery pack For details, see Using AC adapter and battery on page 11. Battery latch - manual The manual battery latch is used to keep the battery pack secured in place. Hard disk drive

(HDD) / Memory / Mini PCI Express Card slot compartment a b c d 8 Chapter 2. Learning the basics First use - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Reading the manuals Read the supplied manuals before using your computer.

Connecting to the power The supplied battery pack is not fully charged at purchase. To charge the battery and begin using your computer, insert the battery pack and connect the computer to an electrical outlet. The battery is automatically charged while the computer is running on AC power. Installing the battery pack Refer to the supplied Setup Poster to install the battery pack. Connecting the computer to an electrical outlet 1 Connect the power cord to the AC adapter. 2 Connect the AC adapter to the AC power adapter jack of the computer firmly. 3 Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet.

Turning on the computer Press the power button to turn on the computer.

Configuring the operating system You may need to configure the operating system when it is first used. The configuration process may include the procedures below.

Accepting the end user license agreement

Configuring the Internet connection

Registering the operating system

Creating a user account 9 Chapter 2. Learning the basics

Putting your computer into sleep state or shutting it down When you finish working with your computer, you can put it into sleep state or shut it down. Putting your computer into sleep state If you will be away from your computer for only a short time, put the computer into sleep state. When the computer is in sleep state, you can quickly wake it to resume use, and bypass the startup process. To put the computer into sleep state, do one of the following.

Click

Press Fn + F1. and select Sleep from the Start menu. Note: Wait until the power indicator light starts blinking (indicating that the computer is in sleep state) before you move your computer. Moving your computer while the hard disk is spinning can damage the hard disk, causing loss of data. To wake the computer, do one of the following.

Press the power button.

Press any key on the keyboard. Shutting down your computer If you are not going to use your computer for a day or two, shut it down. To shut down your computer, click and select Shut down from the Start menu. 10 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using AC adapter and battery - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Checking battery status You can determine the percentage of battery power remaining by checking the battery icon in the notification area. Note: As each computer user has different habits and needs, it is difficult to predict how long a battery charge will last. There are two main factors:

The amount of energy stored in the battery when you commence work. The way you use your computer: for example, how often you access the hard disk drive and how bright you make the computer display.

Charging the battery When you find that the battery power is low, you need to charge the battery or replace it with a fully charged one. You need to charge the battery in any of the following situations:

When you purchase a new battery

If the battery status indicator starts blinking

If the battery has not been used for a long time Notes:

You are advised to insert the battery pack when using your computer to prevent small particles from

entering the inside of your computer. To increase the life of the battery pack, the computer does not start recharging the battery immediately after it drops from fully charged.

Charge the battery at a temperature between 50 F and 86 F (10 C-30 C).

Full charge or discharge is not required.

Removing the battery pack If you are not going to use the computer for an extended period of time, or if you need to send your computer to Lenovo for service, etc. remove the battery pack from the computer. Before removing the battery pack, make sure the computer has been shut down.

Handling the battery If the rechargeable battery pack is replaced with an incorrect type, there may be danger of an explosion. The battery pack contains a small amount of harmful substances. To avoid possible injury and detriment to the environment, pay attention to the following points:

Replace only with a battery of the type recommended by Lenovo.

Keep the battery pack away from fire.

Do not expose the battery pack to water or rain.

Do not attempt to disassemble the battery pack.

Do not short-circuit the battery pack.

Keep the battery pack away from children.

Do not put the battery pack in trash that is disposed of in landfills. When disposing of the battery, comply with local ordinances or regulations and your companys safety standards. 11 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using the touchpad - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a b a Touchpad b Touchpad button To move the cursor on the screen, slide your fingertip over the pad in the direction in which you want the cursor to move. The function of the left/right side corresponds to that of the left/right mouse button on a conventional mouse. Notes:

You can enable/disable the touchpad using Fn + F6.

When the touchpad indicator is lit, the touchpad is disabled. 12 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using the keyboard - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Your computer has a numeric keypad and function keys incorporated in its standard keyboard.

Numeric keypad Y480 The keyboard has keys that, when enabled, work as a 10-key numeric keypad. To enable or disable the numeric keypad, press Fn + F8. Y580 The keyboard has a separate numeric keypad. To enable or disable the numeric keypad, press the Num Lock key. Note: The Num lock indicator will light on if the numeric keypad is enabled. 13 Chapter 2. Learning the basics

Function key combinations Through the use of the function keys, you can change operational features instantly. To use this function, press and hold Fn

; then press one of the function keys a b

. b a 14 Chapter 2. Learning the basics The following describes the features of each function key. Fn + Esc:

Turn on/off the integrated camera. Fn + F1:

Fn + F2:

Fn + F3:

Fn + F4:

Fn + F5:

Fn + F6:

Enter sleep mode. Turn on/off the backlight of the LCD screen. Open the interface for the display device switch to select this notebook or an external display. Open the interface for display resolution settings. Open the interface for integrated wireless devices settings (on/off). Enable/Disable the touchpad. Fn + F8 (Y480):

Enable/Disable the numeric keypad. Fn + F9:

Fn + F10:

Fn + F11:

Fn + F12:

Start/Pause playback of Windows Media Player. Stop playback of Windows Media Player. Skip to the previous track. Skip to the next track. Fn + Insert (Y580):

Fn + PgUp (Y480):

Enable/Disable the scroll lock. Fn + PrtSc:

Fn + Home:

Fn + End:

Activate the system request. Activate the pause function. Activate the break function. Fn + PgDn (Y480):

Activate the insert function. Fn + / :

Fn + / :

Fn + Space

(on select models):

Increase/Decrease display brightness. Increase/Decrease sound volume. Enable/Disable the keyboard backlight. 15 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Connecting external devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Your computer has a wide range of built-in features and connection capabilities.

Using memory cards (not supplied) Your computer supports the following types of memory cards:

Secure Digital (SD) card

Secure Digital PRO (SD PRO) card

MultiMediaCard (MMC)

Memory Stick (MS)

Memory Stick PRO (MS PRO)

xD-Picture (xD) card Notes:

Insert ONLY one card in the slot at a time. This card reader does not support SDIO devices (e.g., SDIO Bluetooth, etc.). Inserting a memory card 1 Push the dummy card until you hear a click. Gently pull the dummy card out of the memory card slot. Note: The dummy card is used for preventing dust and small particles from entering the inside of your computer when the memory card slot is not in use. Retain the dummy card for future use. 2 Slide the memory card in until it clicks into place. Removing a memory card 1 Push the memory card until you hear a click. 2 Gently pull the memory card out of the memory card slot. Note: Before removing the memory card, disable it via Windows safely remove hardware and eject media utility to avoid data corruption. 16 Chapter 2. Learning the basics

Connecting USB devices You can connect a USB device to your computer by inserting its USB plug (Type A) into the USB port on your computer. The first time you plug a USB device into a particular USB port on your computer, Windows automatically installs a driver for that device. After the driver is installed, you can disconnect and reconnect the device without performing any additional steps. Note: Typically, Windows detects a new device after connecting it, and then installs the driver automatically. However, some devices may require you to install the driver before connecting. Check the documentation provided by the devices manufacturer before connecting the device. Before disconnecting a USB storage device, make sure your computer has finished transferring data by that device. Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area of Windows to remove the device before disconnecting. Note: If your USB device uses a power cord, connect the device to a power source before connecting it. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized. 17 Chapter 2. Learning the basics

Connecting a Bluetooth device If your computer has an integrated Bluetooth adapter card, it can connect to and transfer data wirelessly to other Bluetooth enabled devices, such as notebook computers, PDAs and cell phones. You can transfer data between these devices without cables and up to 10 meters range in open space. Note: The actual maximum range may vary due to interference and transmission barriers. To get the best possible connection speed, place the device as near your computer as possible. Enabling Bluetooth communications on your computer Press Fn + F5 to make configuration. Notes:

When you do not need to use the Bluetooth function, turn it off to save battery power.

You need to pair the Bluetooth enabled device with your computer before you can transfer data between them. Read the documentation supplied with the Bluetooth enabled device for details on how to pair the device with your computer. 18 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Special keys and buttons - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

b c a

OneKey Rescue system button a

When the computer is powered-off, press this button to start Lenovo OneKey Rescue system.

In Windows operating system, press this button to start Lenovo OneKey Recovery system. Note: For details, see OneKey Rescue system on page 25. 19 Chapter 2. Learning the basics

OneKey Theater button b Lenovo OneKey Theater provides three scenario modes for using your computer in different ways: normal mode, movie mode, music mode, picture mode, and intelligent mode. These modes are preset enhancements by Lenovo to improve visual and aural experiences via your computer in different usage scenarios. You can manually choose between normal, movie and intelligent mode. Picture or music mode is automatically selected if your computer is in intelligent mode. To manually select a desired mode:

1 Press and release the OneKey Theater button to display the on-screen menu. 2 Keep pressing and releasing the button until the icon of your desired mode is highlighted. The computer switches to the selected mode after 2 seconds. Normal mode The default mode. Movie mode Provides enhanced visual and audio output. Intelligent mode Lenovo OneKey Theater switches intelligently between movie mode, music mode, and picture mode according to the application you are using. Notes:

You can enable or disable the OneKey Theater feature via the Start menu.

Some applications may not be compatible with intelligent mode.

Volume button c Mute/Unmute 20 Chapter 2. Learning the basics System status indicators - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

These indicators inform you of the computer status. a b c d e a b c d e Touchpad indicator Battery status indicator Power status indicator Caps lock indicator Num lock indicator 21 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Securing your computer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

This section provides information about how to help protect your computer from theft and unauthorized use.

Attaching a security lock (not supplied) You can attach a security lock to your computer to help prevent it from being removed without your permission. For details on installing the security lock, please refer to the instructions shipped with the security lock that you have purchased. Refer to the Right-side view on page 5 for the location of the Kensington slot. Notes:

You are responsible for evaluating, selecting, and implementing the locking devices and security Before purchasing any security product, verify that it is compatible with this type of security keyhole. features. Lenovo offers no comment judgement or warranty regarding the function, quality or performance of locking devices and security features.

Using VeriFace VeriFace is a face recognition software which takes a digital snapshot, extracts key features of your face, and creates a digital map that becomes the systems password. If you want to activate VeriFace for the first time, click the VeriFace icon on the desktop to register your facial image. Notes:

You can determine whether to use this function when you log on the system. The face registration and verification works best in an environment with steady and even light. For more details on VeriFace, see the software help.

Using passwords Using passwords helps prevent your computer from being used by others. Once you set a password and enable it, a prompt appears on the screen each time you power on the computer. Enter your password at the prompt. The computer cannot be used unless you enter the correct password. Note: This password can be from one to seven alphanumeric characters in any combination. For details about how to set the password, see the Help to the right of the screen in BIOS setup utility. Note: To enter BIOS setup utility, press F2 when the Lenovo logo appears on the screen while the computer is starting up. 22 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet As a global network, the Internet connects computers worldwide, providing services such as e-mailing, information searching, electronic commerce, Web browsing and entertainment. You can connect the computer to the Internet in the following ways:

Wired connection: use physical wiring to connect. Wireless network technology: connect without wiring. Wired connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Wired connections are a reliable and safe way to connect the computer to the Internet. Cable DSL Cable Internet services use a cable modem connected to the residential cable TV line. DSL is a family of related technologies that bring high-speed network access to homes and small businesses over ordinary telephone lines.

Hardware connection Cable DSL TV cable Telephone line Splitter *

Splitter *

Cable modem *

DSL modem *

* Not supplied. Note: The above diagrams are for reference only. Actual connection method may vary.

Software configuration Consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) for details on how to configure your computer.

23 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet Wireless connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Wireless connections provide mobile access to the Internet, allowing you to stay online anywhere the wireless signal covers. Divided by the signal scales, wireless connection to the Internet can be built based on the following standards. Wi-Fi WiMAX Wi-Fi networks cover a small physical area, like a home, office, or small group of buildings. An access point is necessary for the connection. WiMAX networks connect several Wireless LAN systems to cover a metropolitan area, providing high-speed broadband access without the need for cables. Note: Your computer may not support all wireless connection methods.

Using Wi-Fi/WiMAX Enabling wireless connection To enable wireless communications, do the following:

Press Fn + F5 to make configuration. Hardware connection Access point *

Wi-Fi/WiMAX network

* Not supplied Software configuration Consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) and search Windows Help and Support Center for details on how to configure your computer. 24 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system OneKey Rescue system - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Introduction The Lenovo OneKey Rescue system is an easy-to-use application that can be used to back up the data on your system partition (C drive) for easy restore when required. You can run Lenovo OneKey Recovery under the Windows operating system, and the OneKey Rescue system without starting the Windows operating system.

Attention:

In order to utilize the features of the OneKey Rescue system, your hard disk already includes a hidden partition by default to store the system image file and OneKey Rescue system program files. This default partition is hidden for security reasons and is the reason the available disk space is less than it claims. The exact available hard disk space depends on the file size of the mirror image file (based on the size of operating system and preinstalled software).

Using Lenovo OneKey Recovery (within Windows operating system) In Windows operating system, double click the OneKey Recovery system Icon on the desktop to launch Lenovo OneKey Recovery. Within the program, you can back up the system partition on the hard disk drive, other storage devices, or by creating recovery discs. Notes:

The backup process and creation of recovery discs may take some time, connect the AC adapter and battery pack to your computer.

After the recovery discs are burned, please number them so that you can use them in the correct order.

Computers without an integrated optical drive support the creation of recovery discs; however an appropriate external optical drive is needed to physically create the recovery discs. For more instructions, see the Help file of Lenovo OneKey Recovery.

Using Lenovo OneKey Rescue system (without Windows operating system) In the event that the operating system cannot be loaded, follow the steps below to access OneKey Rescue system.

Shut down your computer.

Press the key to launch OneKey Rescue system. Within the program, you can choose to restore your system partition to the original factory status, or to a previously generated backup. Note: The recovery process is irreversible. Make sure to back up any critical data before using the recovery feature. 25 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system

Creating a recovery disc(s) Your computer does not ship with a recovery disc. You can use Lenovo OneKey Recovery system to create a recovery disc(s), which can be used to start and restore your computer in case of a system failure. To create a recovery disc(s):

Insert a recordable disc into the optical drive on your computer. Note: If your computer does not come with an integrated optical drive or if the integrated optical drive does not support disc creating, connect an appropriate external optical drive to your computer.

In Windows, press the OneKey Rescue system button to launch Lenovo OneKey Recovery system.

On the main screen, click Create Recovery Disc.

Choose the type of recovery disc(s). You can create three types of recovery disc(s): recovery disc(s) with existing backup image, recovery disc(s) from the current system partition, and factory default recovery disc(s). Select the type of recovery disc you want to create and follow the on-screen instructions.

Insert additional recordable disc(s) when prompted. Notes:

The estimated number of discs needed will be displayed before the process of creating the recovery disc(s) begins. To minimize the number of discs needed, use recordable DVDs as the media. Also make sure your optical drive is compatible with the disc intended for use.

After recovery disc creation, number the discs appropriately for use in their correct order. The first disc created will be used to start the computer in the case of a system failure. 26 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Frequently asked questions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

This section lists frequently asked questions and tells where you can find detailed answers. For details about each publication included in the package with your computer, see Lenovo IdeaPad Y480/Y580 Setup Poster. What safety precautions should I follow when using my computer?

See Chapter 1. Important safety information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. How can I prevent problems with my computer?

See Chapter 2. Use and care Information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. What are the main hardware features of my computer?

More information can be found in Chapter 1 and 2. Where can I find the detailed specifications for my computer?

See http://consumersupport.lenovo.com. I need to upgrade a device or I need to replace one of the following: the hard disk drive, memory, or the keyboard. See Appendix. CRU instructions on page 33 of this guide. Where are the recovery discs?

Your computer did not come with a recovery disc. For an explanation of the alternative recovery methods offered by Lenovo, see Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system on page 25. How can I contact the customer support center?

See " Chapter 3. Getting help and service" of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. Where can I find warranty information?

For the warranty applicable to your computer, including the warranty period and type of warranty service, see the Lenovo limited warranty flyer that came with your computer. How can I install the device drivers?

A compatible device driver is a requirement to ensure correct operation and performance of each component in your computer. If your computer is pre-installed with an operating system, Lenovo provides all drivers that you need in your hard disk. What can I do if the backup process fails?

If you can start the backup feature without a problem, but it fails during the backup process, please try the following steps:

1 Close other applications, then restart the backup process. 2 Check if the destination media is damaged, try to select another path and then try again. 27 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting When do I need to restore the system to the factory status?

You can use this feature when your system fails or you need to re-install your operating system. This will restore your computer back to the initial status when you first booted up your computer after receiving it from the store. If there is critical data on your current partition, back it up before you run this recovery feature. 28 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

If you do not find your problem here, see Chapter 2. The following section only describes problems that might negate the need to refer to the more comprehensive information in Chapter 2. Display problems When I turn on the computer, nothing appears on the screen.

If the screen is blank, make sure that:

- The battery is installed correctly.

- The AC adapter is connected to the computer and the power cord is plugged into a working electrical outlet.

- The computer power is on. (Press the power button again for confirmation.)

- The memory is installed correctly. If these items are properly set, and the screen remains blank, have the computer serviced. When I turn on the computer, only a white cursor appears on a blank screen. My screen goes blank while the computer is on. A Password problem I forgot my password. Keyboard problems A number appears when you enter a letter (Y480).

Restore backed-up files to your Windows environment or the entire contents of your hard disk to the original factory contents using OneKey Recovery. If you still see only the cursor on the screen, have the computer serviced.

Your screen saver or power management may be enabled. Do one of the following to exit from the screen saver or to resume from sleep or hibernation mode:

- Touch the touchpad.

- Press any key on the keyboard.

- Press the power button. Press Fn + F2 to confirm whether the LCD screen has been turned off.

If you forget your user password, you must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the password changed. If you forget your HDD password, a Lenovo authorized servicer cannot reset your password or recover data from the hard disk. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the hard disk drive replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service. If you forget your supervisor password, a Lenovo authorized servicer cannot reset your password. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the system board replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service. The numeric lock function is on. To disable it, press Fn + F8. 29 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Sleep or hibernation problems The critical low-battery error message appears, and the computer immediately turns off. The computer enters sleep mode immediately after Power-on self-test

(POST).

The battery power is getting low. Connect the AC adapter to the computer, or replace the battery with a fully charged one.

Make sure that:

- The battery is charged.

- The operating temperature is within the acceptable range. See Chapter 2. Use and care Information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. Note: If the battery is charged and the temperature is within range, have the computer serviced. The computer does not return from sleep mode and the computer does not work.

If the computer does not return from sleep mode, it may have entered hibernation mode automatically because the battery is depleted. Check the power indicator. If your computer is in sleep mode, connect the AC adapter to the computer, then press any key or the power button. If your computer is in hibernation mode or power-off state, connect the AC adapter to the computer, then press the power button to resume operation. Note: If the system still does not return from sleep mode, your system has stopped responding, and you cannot turn off the computer; reset the computer. Unsaved data may be lost. To reset the computer, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds or more. If the computer is still not reset, remove the AC adapter and the battery. Computer screen problems The screen is blank.

Do the following:

- If you are using the AC adapter, or using the battery, and the battery status indicator is on, press Fn + to make the screen brighter.

- If the power indicator is in blinking, press the power button to resume from the sleep mode.

- If the problem persist, follow the solution in the following problem The screen is unreadable or distorted.

- Press Fn + F2 to confirm whether the LCD screen has been turned off. The screen is unreadable or distorted.

Make sure that:

- The display device driver is installed correctly.

- The screen resolution and color quality are correctly set.

- The monitor type is correct. Incorrect characters appear on the screen.

Did you install the operating system or application program correctly? If they are installed and configured correctly, have the computer serviced. Sound problems No sound can be heard from the speaker even when the volume is turned up.

Make sure that:

- The Mute function is off.

- The headphone jack is not used.

- Speakers are selected as the playback device. 30 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Battery problems Your computer shuts down before the battery status indicator shows empty.

-or-

Your computer operates after the battery status indicator shows empty. The operating time for a fully charged battery is short. The computer does not operate with a fully charged battery. The battery does not charge. A hard disk drive problem The hard disk drive does not work. A startup problem

Discharge and recharge the battery.

For details, see Handling the battery in Chapter 2. The surge protector in the battery might be active. Turn off the computer for one minute to reset the protector; then turn on the computer again. For details, see Handling the battery in Chapter 2. In the Boot menu in BIOS setup utility, make sure that the hard disk drive is included in the Boot Device Priority correctly. The Microsoft Windows operating system does not start.

Use the OneKey Rescue system to help solve or identify your problem. For details about OneKey Rescue system, see Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system on page 25. OneKey Rescue system problems Backup cannot be made.

You are not currently using a Windows operating system.

There is not enough space to store the backed up data. You will need to free more hard disk space on your system partition (C drive). Fail to restore system partition to factory default.

The system partition, such as the partition size or the drive capacity of C, has been modified. 31 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Other problems Your computer does not respond.

To turn off your computer, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds or more. If the computer still does not respond, remove the AC adapter and the battery.

Your computer might lock when it enters sleep mode during a communication operation. Disable the sleep timer when you are working on the network. The computer does not start from a device you want.

See the Boot menu of the BIOS setup utility. Make sure that the Boot Device Priority in the BIOS setup utility is set so that the computer starts from the device you want.

Also make sure that the device from which the computer starts is

enabled. In the Boot menu in the BIOS setup utility, make sure that the device is included in the Boot Device Priority list. Press F12 when the Lenovo logo appears on the screen while the computer is starting up to select the device you want the computer starts from. The connected external device does not work.

Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than USB while the computer power is on; otherwise, you might damage your computer.

When using a high power consumption external devices such as an external USB optical disk drive, use external device power adapter. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized, or system shut down may result. For more technical support, please visit consumer product website http://consumersupport.lenovo.com. 32 Appendix. CRU instructions Notes:

The illustrations used in this chapter are of the Lenovo IdeaPad Y580, unless otherwise stated. The following steps about upgrading and replacing devices are the same for the Y480 and Y580. Replacing the battery - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Note: Use only the battery provided by Lenovo. Any other battery could ignite or explode. To replace the battery, do the following:

1 Turn off the computer, or enter hibernation mode. Disconnect the AC adapter and all cables from the computer. 2 Close the computer display, and turn the computer over. 3 Unlock the manual battery latch

. Holding the spring-loaded battery latch in the

, remove the battery pack in the direction shown by the arrow a c

. unlocked position b a c b 4 Install a fully charged battery. 5 Slide the manual battery latch to the locked position. 6 Turn the computer over again. Connect the AC adapter and the cables to the computer again. 33 Appendix. CRU instructions Replacing the hard disk drive - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

You can increase the storage capacity of your computer by replacing the hard disk drive with one of greater capacity. You can purchase a new hard disk drive from your reseller or Lenovo marketing representative. Notes:

Replace the hard disk drive only if you upgrade it or have it repaired. The connectors and bay of the hard disk drive were not designed for frequent changes, or drive swapping. The preinstalled software are not included on an optional hard disk drive.

Handling a hard disk drive

Do not drop the drive or subject it to physical shocks. Put the drive on a material, such as soft cloth, that absorbs the physical shock.

Do not apply pressure to the cover of the drive.

Do not touch the connector. The drive is very sensitive. Incorrect handling can cause damage and permanent loss of data on the hard disk. Before removing the hard disk drive, make a backup copy of all the information on the hard disk, and then turn the computer off. Never remove the drive while the system is operating, in sleep mode, or in hibernation mode. 34 Appendix. CRU instructions To replace the hard disk drive, do the following:

1 Turn off the computer; then disconnect the AC adapter and all cables from the computer. 2 Close the computer display, and then turn the computer over. 3 Remove the battery pack. 4 Remove the Hard disk drive (HDD)/Memory/Mini PCI Express Card slot compartment cover. a. Loosen the screws that secure the compartment cover b. Remove the compartment cover

. b a b 5 Remove the frame fixing screws c

. c a

. c 35 Appendix. CRU instructions 6 Take out the hard disk drive secured in a metal frame d

. d 7 Remove the screws and detach the metal frame from the hard disk drive. 8 Attach the metal frame to a new hard disk drive and tighten the screws. 9 Put the hard disk drive gently into the hard disk drive bay with the tab facing upwards and the connectors facing each other; then push it firmly into space. 0 Reinstall the frame fixing screws. A Reinstall the compartment cover and tighten the screws. B Reinstall the battery pack. C Turn the computer over again. Connect the AC adapter and the cables to the computer again. 36 Appendix. CRU instructions Replacing memory - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

You can increase the amount of memory in your computer by installing a double-data-rate three synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDR3 SDRAM)-available as an option-in the memory slot of your computer. DDR3 SDRAMs are available in various capacities. Note: Use only the memory types supported by your computer. If you incorrectly install optional memory, or install an unsupported memory type, a warning beep will sound when you try to start the computer. To install a DDR3 SDRAM, do the following:

1 Touch a metal table or a grounded metal object to reduce any static electricity in your body, which could damage the DDR3 SDRAM. Do not touch the contact edge of the DDR3 SDRAM. 2 Turn off the computer. Disconnect the AC adapter and all cables from the computer. 3 Close the computer display, and turn the computer over. 4 Remove the battery pack. 5 Remove the Hard disk drive (HDD)/Memory/Mini PCI Express Card slot compartment cover. a. Loosen the screws that secure the compartment cover b. Remove the compartment cover

. b a b a

. 37 Appendix. CRU instructions 6 If two DDR3 SDRAMs are already installed in the memory slot, remove one of them to make room for the new one by pressing out on the latches on both edges of the socket at the same time. Be sure to save the old DDR3 SDRAM for future use. a a b 7 Align the notch of the DDR3 SDRAM with the protrusion of the socket and gently insert the DDR3 SDRAM into the socket at a 30-45 angle. 8 Push the DDR3 SDRAM inward toward the socket until the latches on both edges of the socket are pushed into the closed position. b a 9 Reinstall the compartment cover and tighten the screws. 0 Reinstall the battery pack. A Turn the computer over again. Connect the AC adapter and the cables to the computer again. Note: If only one DDR3 SDRAM is used on the computer you are servicing, the card must be installed in SLOT-0 (

: lower slot), but not in SLOT-1 (

: upper slot). 38 Appendix. CRU instructions To make sure that the DDR3 SDRAM is installed correctly, do as follows:

1 Turn the computer on. 2 Hold F2 during startup. The BIOS setup utility screen opens. The System Memory item shows the total amount of memory installed in your computer. 39 Appendix. CRU instructions Removing the optical drive - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

To remove the optical drive, do the following:

1 Remove the Hard disk drive (HDD)/Memory/Mini PCI Express Card slot compartment cover. 2 Remove the screw shown in the illustration 3 Gently pull the optical drive out

. b b a

. a The following table provides a list of CRUs (Customer Replaceable Units) for your computer, and informs you of where to find replacement instructions. Setup Poster User Guide AC adapter Power cord for AC adapter Battery Bottom access doors Hard disk drive Memory Optical drive O O O O O O O O 40 Trademarks The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Lenovo IdeaPad OneKey VeriFace Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. NVIDIA and Optimus are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of NVIDIA Corporation in the United States and other countries. AMD and PowerXpress are trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. Premium Surround Sound technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. SRS Premium Surround Sound provides the ultimate audio experience for music, movies and games on the PC. Other company, products, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 41 Notes Before using the product, be sure to read Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide first. Some instructions in this guide may assume that you are using Windows 7. If you are using other Windows operating system, some operations may be slightly different. If you are using other operating systems, some operations may not apply to you. The features described in this guide are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer and/or your computer may include features that are not described in this user guide. The illustrations used in this manual are for Lenovo Y570 unless otherwise stated. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product. Regulatory Notice To refer to it, go to http://consumersupport.lenovo.com/ and click User guides and manuals. First Edition (December 2010) Copyright Lenovo 2010. LENOVO products, data, computer software, and services have been developed exclusively at private expense and are sold to governmental entities as commercial items as defined by 48 C.F.R. 2.101 with limited and restricted rights to use, reproduction and disclosure. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If products, data, computer software, or services are delivered pursuant a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. IdeaPad Y480/ Y580 User Guide V1.0 L e n o v o C h n a i New World. New Thinking.TM www.lenovo.com 2 0 1 2 V1.0_en-US Read the safety notices and important tips in the included manuals before using your computer.

Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 1 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM P/N:#########

Printed in China Lenovo limited warranty L505-0010-02 08/2011 This Lenovo Limited Warranty consists of the following parts:

Part 1 - General Terms Part 2 - Country-specific Terms Part 3 - Warranty Service Information The terms of Part 2 replace or modify terms of Part 1 as specified for a particular country. Part 1 - General Terms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

This Lenovo Limited Warranty applies only to Lenovo hardware products you purchased for your own use and not for resale. This Lenovo Limited Warranty is available in other languages at www.lenovo.com/warranty.

What this Warranty Covers Lenovo warrants that each Lenovo hardware product that you purchase is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use during the warranty period. The warranty period for the product starts on the original date of purchase as shown on your sales receipt or invoice or as may be otherwise specified by Lenovo. The warranty period and type of warranty service that apply to your product are as specified in Part 3 - Warranty Service Information below. This warranty only applies to products in the country or region of purchase. THIS WARRANTY IS YOUR EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY AND REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. AS SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN THAT EVENT, SUCH WARRANTIES APPLY ONLY TO THE EXTENT AND FOR SUCH DURATION AS REQUIRED BY LAW AND ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. AS SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY, THE ABOVE LIMITATION ON DURATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

How to Obtain Warranty Service If the product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, you may obtain warranty service by contacting Lenovo or a Lenovo approved Service Provider. A list of approved Service Providers and their telephone numbers is available at: www.lenovo.com/support/phone. Warranty service may not be available in all locations and may differ from location to location. Charges may apply outside a Service Provider's normal service area. Contact a local Service Provider for information specific to your location. 1 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 2 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Lenovo limited warranty

Customer Responsibilities for Warranty Service Before warranty service is provided, you must take the following steps:

follow the service request procedures specified by the Service Provider

backup or secure all programs and data contained in the product

provide the Service Provider with all system keys or passwords

provide the Service Provider with sufficient, free, and safe access to your facilities to perform service

remove all data, including confidential information, proprietary information and personal information, from the product or, if you are unable to remove any such information, modify the information to prevent its access by another party or so that it is not personal data under applicable law. The Service Provider shall not be responsible for the loss or disclosure of any data, including confidential information, proprietary information, or personal information, on a product returned or accessed for warranty service

remove all features, parts, options, alterations, and attachments not covered by the warranty

ensure that the product or part is free of any legal restrictions that prevent its replacement

if you are not the owner of a product or part, obtain authorization from the owner for the Service Provider to provide warranty service

What Your Service Provider Will Do to Correct Problems When you contact a Service Provider, you must follow the specified problem determination and resolution procedures. The Service Provider will attempt to diagnose and resolve your problem by telephone, e-mail or remote assistance. The Service Provider may direct you to download and install designated software updates. Some problems may be resolved with a replacement part that you install yourself called a Customer Replaceable Unit or CRU. If so, the Service Provider will ship the CRU to you for you to install. If your problem cannot be resolved over the telephone; through the application of software updates or the installation of a CRU, the Service Provider will arrange for service under the type of warranty service designated for the product under Part 3 - Warranty Service Information below. If the Service Provider determines that it is unable to repair your product, the Service Provider will replace it with one that is at least functionally equivalent. If the Service Provider determines that it is unable to either repair or replace your product, your sole remedy under this Limited Warranty is to return the product to your place of purchase or to Lenovo for a refund of your purchase price. 2 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 3 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Lenovo limited warranty

Replacement Products and Parts When warranty service involves the replacement of a product or part, the replaced product or part becomes Lenovos property and the replacement product or part becomes your property. Only unaltered Lenovo products and parts are eligible for replacement. The replacement product or part provided by Lenovo may not be new, but it will be in good working order and at least functionally equivalent to the original product or part. The replacement product or part shall be warranted for the balance of the period remaining on the original product.

Use of Personal Contact Information If you obtain service under this warranty, you authorize Lenovo to store, use and process information about your warranty service and your contact information, including name, phone numbers, address, and e-mail address. Lenovo may use this information to perform service under this warranty. We may contact you to inquire about your satisfaction with our warranty service or to notify you about any product recalls or safety issues. In accomplishing these purposes, you authorize Lenovo to transfer your information to any country where we do business and to provide it to entities acting on our behalf. We may also disclose it where required by law. Lenovos privacy policy is available at www.lenovo.com/.

What this Warranty Does not Cover This warranty does not cover the following:

uninterrupted or error-free operation of a product

loss of, or damage to, your data by a product

any software programs, whether provided with the product or installed subsequently

failure or damage resulting from misuse, abuse, accident, modification, unsuitable physical or operating environment, natural disasters, power surges, improper maintenance, or use not in accordance with product information materials

damage caused by a non-authorized service provider

failure of, or damage caused by, any third party products, including those that Lenovo may provide or integrate into the Lenovo product at your request

any technical or other support, such as assistance with how-to questions and those regarding product set-up and installation

products or parts with an altered identification label or from which the identification label has been removed 3 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 4 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Lenovo limited warranty

Limitation of Liability Lenovo is responsible for loss or damage to your product only while it is in the Service Providers possession or in transit, if the Service Provider is responsible for the transportation. Neither Lenovo nor the Service Provider is responsible for loss or disclosure of any data, including confidential information, proprietary information, or personal information, contained in a product. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, AND NOTWITHSTANDING THE FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN, SHALL LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS, OR SERVICE PROVIDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING EVEN IF INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER THEORY OF LIABILITY: 1) THIRD PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; 2) LOSS, DAMAGE OR DISCLOSURE OF YOUR DATA; 3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS REVENUE, GOODWILL OR ANTICIPATED SAVINGS. IN NO CASE SHALL THE TOTAL LIABILITY OF LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATESS, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS OR SERVICE PROVIDERS FOR DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF ACTUAL DIRECT DAMAGES, NOT TO EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS DO NOT APPLY TO DAMAGES FOR BODILY INJURY

(INCLUDING DEATH), DAMAGE TO REAL PROPERTY OR DAMAGE TO TANGIBLE PERSONAL PROPERTY FOR WHICH LENOVO IS LIABLE UNDER LAW. AS SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

Your Other Rights THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS ACCORDING TO THE APPLICABLE LAWS OF YOUR STATE OR JURISDICTION. YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS UNDER A WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH LENOVO. NOTHING IN THIS WARRANTY AFFECTS STATUTORY RIGHTS, INCLUDING RIGHTS OF CONSUMERS UNDER LAWS OR REGULATIONS GOVERNING THE SALE OF CONSUMER GOODS THAT CANNOT BE WAIVED OR LIMITED BY CONTRACT. 4 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 5 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Lenovo limited warranty Part 2 - Country-specific Terms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Australia Lenovo means Lenovo (Australia & New Zealand) Pty Limited ABN 70 112 394 411. Address:

Level 10, North Tower, 1-5 Railway Street, Chatswood, NSW, 2067. Telephone: +61 2 8003 8200. Email: lensyd_au@lenovo.com The following replaces the same section in Part 1:

What this Warranty Covers:

Lenovo warrants that each hardware product that you purchase is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and conditions during the warranty period. If the product fails due to a covered defect during the warranty period, Lenovo will provide you a remedy under this Limited Warranty. The warranty period for the product starts on the original date of purchase specified on your sales receipt or invoice unless Lenovo informs you otherwise in writing. The warranty period and type of warranty service that apply to your product are set forth below in Part 3 - Warranty Service Information. THE BENEFITS GIVEN BY THIS WARRANTY ARE IN ADDITION TO YOUR RIGHTS AND REMEDIES AT LAW, INCLUDING THOSE UNDER THE AUSTRALIAN CONSUMER LAW. The following replaces the same section in Part 1:

Replacement Products and Parts:

When warranty service involves the replacement of a product or part, the replaced product or part becomes Lenovo's property and the replacement product or part becomes your property. Only unaltered Lenovo products and parts are eligible for replacement. The replacement product or part provided by Lenovo may not be new, but it will be in good working order and at least functionally equivalent to the original product or part. The replacement product or part shall be warranted for the balance of the period remaining on the original product. Products and parts presented for repair may be replaced by refurbished products or parts of the same type rather than being repaired. Refurbished parts may be used to repair the product; and repair of the product may result in loss of data, if the product is capable of retaining user-generated data. The following is added to the same section in Part 1:

Use of Personal Contact Information:

Lenovo will not be able to perform our service under this warranty if you refuse to provide your information or do not wish us to transfer your information to our agent or contractor. You have the right to access your personal contact information and request correction of any errors in it pursuant to the Privacy Act 1988 by contacting Lenovo. The following replaces the same section in Part 1:

5 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 6 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Lenovo limited warranty

Limitation of Liability:

Lenovo is responsible for loss or damage to your product only while it is in the Service Provider's possession or in transit, if the Service Provider is responsible for the transportation. Neither Lenovo nor the Service Provider is responsible for loss or disclosure of any data, including confidential information, proprietary information, or personal information, contained in a product. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND NOTWITHSTANDING THE FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN, SHALL LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS, OR SERVICE PROVIDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING EVEN IF INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER THEORY OF LIABILITY: 1) THIRD PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; 2) LOSS, DAMAGE OR DISCLOSURE OF YOUR DATA; 3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS REVENUE, GOODWILL OR ANTICIPATED SAVINGS. IN NO CASE SHALL THE TOTAL LIABILITY OF LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATESS, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS OR SERVICE PROVIDERS FOR DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF ACTUAL DIRECT DAMAGES, NOT TO EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS DO NOT APPLY TO DAMAGES FOR BODILY INJURY

(INCLUDING DEATH), DAMAGE TO REAL PROPERTY OR DAMAGE TO TANGIBLE PERSONAL PROPERTY FOR WHICH LENOVO IS LIABLE UNDER LAW. The following replaces the same section in Part 1:

Your Other Rights:

THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS AT LAW, INCLUDING UNDER THE AUSTRALIAN CONSUMER LAW. NOTHING IN THIS WARRANTY AFFECTS STATUTORY RIGHTS OR RIGHTS AT LAW, INCLUDING RIGHTS THAT CANNOT BE WAIVED OR LIMITED BY CONTRACT. For example, our products come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australian Consumer Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the products repaired or replaced if the products fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure. New Zealand The following is added to the same section in Part 1:

6 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 7 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Lenovo limited warranty

Use of Personal Information:

Lenovo will not be able to perform our service under this warranty if you refuse to provide your information or do not wish us to transfer your information to our agent or contractor. You have the right to access your personal information and request correction of any errors in it pursuant to the Privacy Act 1993 by contacting Lenovo (Australia & New Zealand) Pty Limited ABN 70 112 394 411. Address: Level 10, North Tower, 1-5 Railway Street, Chatswood, NSW, 2067. Telephone: 61 2 8003 8200. Email: lensyd_au@lenovo.com Bangladesh, Cambodia, India, Indonesia, Nepal, Philippines, Vietnam and Sri Lanka The following is added to Part 1:

Dispute Resolution Disputes arising out of or in connection with this warranty shall be finally settled by arbitration held in Singapore. This warranty shall be governed, construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of Singapore, without regard to conflict of laws. If you acquired the product in India, disputes arising out of or in connection with this warranty shall be finally settled by arbitration held in Bangalore, India. Arbitration in Singapore shall be held in accordance with the Arbitration Rules of Singapore International Arbitration Center (SIAC Rules) then in effect. Arbitration in India shall be held in accordance with the laws of India then in effect. The arbitration award shall be final and binding on the parties without appeal. Any award shall be in writing and set forth the findings of fact and the conclusions of law. All arbitration proceedings, including all documents presented in such proceedings shall be conducted in the English language. The English language version of this warranty prevails over any other language version in such proceedings.

European Economic Area (EEA) The following is added to Part 1:

Customers in the EEA may contact Lenovo at the following address: EMEA Service Organisation, Lenovo (International) B.V., Floor 2, Einsteinova 21, 851 01, Bratislava, Slovakia. Service under this warranty for Lenovo hardware products purchased in EEA countries may be obtained in any EEA country in which the product has been announced and made available by Lenovo. Russia The following is added to Part 1:

Product Service Life The product service life is four (4) years from the original date of purchase. 7 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 8 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Lenovo limited warranty Part 3 - Warranty Service Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Product or machine type Country or region of purchase Warranty period Types of warranty service 3, 4 1, 3, 4 Notebook:

20131, 2093 20132, 2099 Taiwan, Korea Singapore China (Hong Kong S.A.R.), China

(Macau S.A.R.), India, Indonesia, Malaysia, Thailand, Philippines, Vietnam, Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar, Egypt, South Africa, Saudi Arabia, UAE, Algeria, Nigeria, Kenya, Sri Lanka Bosnia-Herzegovina, Croatia, Cyprus, Greece, Macedonia, Romania, Slovenia, Serbia Argentina, Colombia, Peru, Venezuela, Bolivia, Uruguay, Chile, Paraguay, Ecuador Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Estonia, France, Finland, Germany, Iceland, Israel, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Norway, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, the United Kingdom Japan, Australia, New Zealand United States of America, Canada Brazil Mexico Russia, Ukraine, the Republic of Kazakhstan, Belarus, Turkmenistan, Azerbaijan, Georgia Poland, Turkey, Czech Republic, Hungary, Slovakia, Bulgaria 1, 4 1, 3 4 1, 5 4 1, 4 parts and labor -

1 year battery pack -

1 year parts and labor -

2 years battery pack -

1 year If required, the Service Provider will provide repair or exchange service depending on the type of warranty service specified for your product and the available service. Scheduling of service will depend upon the time of your call, parts availability, and other factors. 8 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 9 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Lenovo limited warranty

Types of Warranty Service 1 Customer Replaceable Unit (CRU) Service Under CRU Service, the Service Provider will ship CRUs to you at its cost for installation by you. CRU information and replacement instructions are shipped with your product and are available from Lenovo at any time upon request. CRUs that are easily installed by you are called Self-

service CRUs. Optional-service CRUs are CRUs that may require some technical skill and tools. Installation of Self-service CRUs is your responsibility. You may request that a Service Provider install Optional-service CRUs under one of the other types of warranty service designated for your product. An optional service offering may be available for purchase from a Service Provider or Lenovo under which Self-service CRUs would be installed for you. You may find a list of CRUs and their designation in the publication that was shipped with your product or at www.lenovo.com/CRUs. The requirement to return a defective CRU, if any, will be specified in the instructions shipped with a replacement CRU. When return is required: 1) return instructions, a prepaid return shipping label, and a container will be included with the replacement CRU; and 2) you may be charged for the replacement CRU if the Service Provider does not receive the defective CRU from you within thirty (30) days of your receipt of the replacement CRU. 2 On-site Service Under On-Site Service, a Service Provider will either repair or exchange the product at your location. You must provide a suitable working area to allow disassembly and reassembly of the product. Some repairs may need to be completed at a service center. If so, the Service Provider will send the product to the service center at its expense. 3 Courier or Depot Service Under Courier or Depot Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged at a designated service center, with shipping at the expense of the Service Provider. You are responsible for disconnecting the product and packing it in a shipping container provided to you to return your product to a designated service center. A courier will pick up your product and deliver it to the designated service center. The service center will return the product to you at its expense. 4 Customer Carry-In Service Under Customer Carry-In Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged after you deliver it to a designated service center at your risk and expense. After the product has been repaired or exchanged, it will be made available to you for collection. If you fail to collect the product, the Service Provider may dispose of the product as it sees fit, with no liability to you. 5 Mail-In Service Under Mail-In Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged at a designated service center after you deliver it at your risk and expense. After the product has been repaired or exchanged, it will be returned to you at Lenovo's risk and expense, unless the Service Provider specifies otherwise. 6 Customer Two-Way Mail-In Service Under Customer Two-Way Mail-In Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged after you deliver it to a designated service center at your risk and expense. After the product has been repaired or exchanged, it will be made available to you for return shipping at your risk and 9 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 10 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Lenovo limited warranty expense. If you fail to arrange return shipment, the Service Provider may dispose of the product as it sees fit, with no liability to you. 7 Product Exchange Service Under Product Exchange Service, Lenovo will ship a replacement product to your location. You are responsible for its installation and verification of its operation. The replacement product becomes your property in exchange for the failed product, which becomes the property of Lenovo. You must pack the failed product in the shipping carton in which you received the replacement product and return it to Lenovo. Transportation charges, both ways, shall be at Lenovo's expense. If you fail to use the carton in which the replacement product was received, you may be responsible for any damage to the failed product occurring during shipment. You may be charged for the replacement product if Lenovo does not receive the failed product within thirty (30) days of your receipt of the replacement product. 10 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 11 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Product specific Notices The notices in this appendix are specific to the product with the given MT number. Notices that are common for most Lenovo products are included in Appendix A. Notices of the Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. Energy star information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy aimed at saving money and protecting the environment through energy efficient products and practices. Lenovo is proud to offer our customers products with an ENERGY STAR compliant designation. Lenovo computers of the following machine types, if the ENERGY STAR mark is affixed, have been designed and tested to conform to the ENERGY STAR program requirements for computers.

20131, 2093

20132, 2099 By using ENERGY STAR compliant products and taking advantage of the power-management features of your computer, you reduce the consumption of electricity. Reduced electrical consumption contributes to potential financial savings, a cleaner environment, and the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions. For more information about ENERGY STAR, visit http://www.energystar.gov. Lenovo encourages you to make efficient use of energy an integral part of your day-to-day operations. To help in this endeavor, Lenovo has preset the following power-management features to take effect when your computer has been inactive for a specified duration:

11 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 12 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Product specific Notices Table 1. ENERGY STAR power-management features Windows 7 Power plan: Energy Star

Turn off the display:

After 10 minutes

Put the computer to sleep:

After 25 minutes

Advanced power settings:

- Turn off hard disks:

After 20 minutes

- Hibernate: After 1 hour To awaken your computer from a Sleep mode, press any key on your keyboard. For more information about these settings, refer to your Windows Help and Support information system. 12 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 13 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Product specific Notices Electronic emissions notices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

The following information refers to Lenovo IdeaPad Y480/Y580, machine type 20131, 2093 /

20132, 2099.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee the interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits. Proper cables and connectors are available from Lenovo authorized dealers. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible party:

Lenovo (United States) Incorporated 1009 Think Place - Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 U.S.A. Telephone: (919) 294-5900 13 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 14 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Product specific Notices

Industry Canada Class B Emission Compliance Statement This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Avis de conformit la rglementation dIndustrie Canada Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

German Class B Compliance Statement Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:

Hinweis fr Gerte der Klasse B EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen Vertrglichkeit Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (frher 89/

336/EWG) zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hlt die Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse B ein. Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Gerte wie in den Handbchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren drfen auch nur von der Lenovo empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. Lenovo bernimmt keine Verantwortung fr die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der Lenovo verndert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne Empfehlung der Lenovo gesteckt/

eingebaut werden. Deutschland:

Einhaltung des Gesetzes ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmittein Dieses Produkt entspricht dem Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln EMVG (frher Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten). Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (frher 89/336/EWG) in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland. Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln, EMVG vom 20. Juli 2007 (frher Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten), bzw. der EMV EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EC

(frher 89/336/EWG), fr Gerte der Klasse B. Dieses Gert ist berechtigt, in bereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-

Konformittszeichen - CE - zu fhren. Verantwortlich fr die Konformittserklrung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo (Deutschland) GmbH, Gropiusplatz 10, D-70563 Stuttgart. Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraf 4 Abs. (1) 4:

Das Gert erfllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse B. 14 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 15 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Product specific Notices

European Union Compliance Statement Class B Compliance European Union - Compliance to the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2004/108/

EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the installation of option cards from other manufacturers. This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B Information Technology Equipment according to European Standard EN 55022. The limits for Class B equipment were derived for typical residential environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication devices. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to reduce the potential for causing interference to radio and TV communications and to other electrical or electronic equipment. Such cables and connectors are available from Lenovo authorized dealers. Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors. IC Statement :

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. Industry Canada - Class B This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled Digital Apparatus, ICES-003 of Industry Canada. Cet appareil numrique respecte les limites de bruits radiolectriques applicables aux appareils numriques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le matrial brouilleur: Appareils Numriques, NMB-003 dicte par lIndustrie. RF exposure warning:

This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This Transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any antenna or transmitters. Avertissement d'exposition RF:

Cet quipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition de rayonnement de la FCC rf dtermines pour un environnement non contrl. Cet metteur ne doit pas n'tre complant ou opration en mme temps qu'aucune autre antenne ou metteur. 15 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 16 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Specifications Model Name: IdeaPad Y480/Y580 Note: The following specifications may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Lenovo reserves Machine Type 20131, 2093 / 20132, 2099 the right to improve and/or change specifications at any time without notice. Form Factor Dimensions Weight LCD size Platform Platform Memory Y480 Y580 Appr. 345 mm 239 mm 20 - 32.8 mm Appr. 385 mm 255 mm 22 - 35.7 mm Appr. 2.2 kg with 6 cell battery Appr. 2.7 kg with 6 cell battery 14-inch wide 15.6-inch wide Intel Chief River platform Type and speed DDR3-1600 DDR3-1066 or DDR3-1333 Maximum supported capacity Slots Hard disk drive Form factor Interface Optical drive Form factor Type Display 8 GB SODIMM 2 2.5-inch, 9.5 mm or 7 mm, 5400 rpm or 7200 rpm 2.5-inch, 9.5 mm or 7 mm, 5400 rpm SATA 150 12.7 mm DVD Rambo or Blu-ray Combo / Rambo Display resolution (LCD) 1366 768 pixels 1366 768 pixels or 1920 1020 pixels Maximum display resolution on external display device LCD backlight 2048 1536 pixels LED 16 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 17 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Specifications I/O Ports USB Audio Communication Video/Audio Video Memory card slot Battery pack Type Cells/Capacity AC adapter Input Output voltage Power Miscellaneous Camera Security USB 2.0 2, USB 3.0 2 Headphone jack 1, Mic-in jack 1 RJ-45 1 HDMI 1 VGA 1 6 in 1 slot 1 (SD/SD PRO/MMC/MS/MS PRO/xD) Li-Ion 6 cell, 48 Wh or 62 Wh 100 - 240 V, 50 - 60 Hz AC 20 V DC 120 W HD Camera Kensington slot 1 17 Y480&Y580 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 18 Tuesday, November 29, 2011 4:17 PM Trademarks The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Lenovo IdeaPad OneKey VeriFace Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. NVIDIA and Optimus are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of NVIDIA Corporation in the United States and other countries. is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. Premium Surround Sound technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. SRS Premium Surround Sound provides the ultimate audio experience for music, movies and games on the PC. Other company, products, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 18

Introduction: Broadcom BCM94313HMGB 802.11g/Draft 802.11n WLAN

+ Bluetooth PCI-E Mini Card User's Guide Before you begin Things you should know BCM94313HMGB network Before you begin Obtain the following information from your network administrator (if you are a home user, obtain this information from the person that installed your wireless access point):

l Network names (SSID) of the specific wireless networks that you want to connect to. l WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) key information (if any) for the networks you want to connect to. l For Microsoft Windows networking, your customer name and workgroup name. l For your network account, your user name and password. l Your IP address (if not using a DHCP server) Things you should know When you start your computer, your Broadcom BCM94313HMGB PCI-E Mini card detects certain wireless networks that are within range. Before you can connect to these and other wireless networks, you must configure a profile for each network using the information you obtained from your network administrator. WEP is a security protocol for wireless local area networks (defined in the IEEE 802.11g standard) that encrypts data sent over radio waves. The use of the WEP key is optional and can be enabled or disabled. If the network you are connecting to has enabled WEP, you must also enable WEP in the network profile and set the WEP key to match the WEP key used by the network. Otherwise, you cannot connect to the network. Broadcom BCM94313HMGB network The Broadcom BCM94313HMGB solution allows you to make a wireless connection to a network, as illustrated below. Back to top Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Back to Contents Page Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Overview Utility Components Overview The Broadcom Wireless Utility enables you to do the following network tasks:

l Manage your wireless networks and create network connection profiles (Wireless Networks tab) l Connect to available networks (utility icon in notification area) l Get information about the network status and signal and noise of your network connection (Link Status tab) l View current and accumulated statistics (Statistics tab) l Find out which broadcasting networks are in range and search for nonbroadcasting networks (Site Monitor tab) l Run tests on the wireless network adapter (Diagnostics tab) l Get date and version information about the utility, and software, hardware, and location details about your wireless network adapter (Information tab) l Manually add or delete trusted servers and enable the manual acceptance or rejection of auto-

provisioning and A-ID group changes (Wireless Networks tab) l Manually import EAP-FAST PACs (Wireless Networks tab) In the utility, you can open Wireless Network Wizard to connect to a basic network or create an ad hoc network, or you can open the Wireless Network Connection Settings tool to connect to an advanced network. To do any of the other tasks, click the tab that is associated with the described task. To start using the utility, right-click the utility icon If the icon is not available, open Broadcom Wireless Utility in Control Panel. in the notification area, and then click Open Utility. NOTE: The utility icon may not appear exactly as shown here. See "Table 1. Signal Strength Indicated by the Broadcom Wireless Utility Icon."

Utility Components Utility components include the utility icon in the notification area, the six utility tabs, and Wireless Network Connection Settings. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (1 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Utility Icon To do any of the following tasks or operations, right-click the utility icon, and then click the appropriate item. l Open the on-line Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide

(Help Files) l Open About WLAN Card Utility to view links to Broadcom and Broadcom Customer Support websites and to view the version and date of the utility (About) l Hide the utility icon (Hide Tray Icon) l Disable or enable the radio (Disable/Enable Radio) l Connect to any of the networks for which you have created a connection profile and are within range (Connect To) l Open the utility to the Wireless Networks tab (Open Utility) l Open the utility to the Link Status tab to view information about the connection (Status) l Display a log of your wireless network events (Display Log) Wireless Networks Tab The Wireless Networks tab has tools that enable you to do the following:

l Use the utility to manage your wireless networks l Add a network connection profile l Edit or remove a network connection profile l Change the order in which profiles are listed under Preferred network connections l Connect to any listed network without changing its order in the list l Disable or enable the radio (Disable/Enable Radio) l Show or hide the utility icon in the notification area l Choose which type of network to access l Lock or unlock a preferred network connection profile l Save your wireless network connection profiles as a WPN file l Import a WPN file l Manually add or delete trusted servers and enable the manual acceptance or rejection of auto-

provisioning and A-ID group changes l Manually import EAP-FAST PACS On the Add menu, you can use either the wireless network wizard that is available from Broadcom Wireless Utility (see Connecting to a Basic Network or Creating an Ad Hoc Network Using the Wireless Network Wizard") or the utility (see "Connecting to an Advanced Network Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility") to add a network connection profile. To use the utility to manage your wireless networks, select the Let this tool manage your wireless networks check box. To add a network connection profile, click the Add arrow, and then click either Use Wizard (basic network) or Use Utility (advanced network). To edit or remove a network connection profile, right-click the network name, and then click either Edit or Remove. To change the order in which profiles are listed under Preferred network connections, click the network name, and then click either the up arrow or down arrow. To connect to any listed network without changing its order in the list, right-click the network name, and then click Connect. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (2 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide To disable the radio, clear the Enable radio check box. To enable the radio, select the Enable radio check box. To hide the utility icon utility icon check box.

, clear the Show utility icon check box. To show the icon, select the Show To choose the type of network to access, click the Options arrow, and then click Advanced. To lock or unlock a preferred network connection profile, right-click anywhere in the row that lists the network name, and then click Lock or Unlock, as appropriate. NOTE: You must have system or administrator rights to be able to lock or unlock a profile. To save your wireless network connection profiles to a WPN file, click the Options arrow, and then click Export (see "Saving Preferred Network Connection Settings to a File" in "Connecting to an Advanced Network Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility."

To import a WPN file, click the Options arrow, and then click Import (see "Importing a Preferred Network Connection Profiles File" in "Connecting to an Advanced Network Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility."

Click Apply or OK after you change any of the settings for the change to take effect. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (3 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide For networks that use the EAP-FAST authentication method, the Wireless WLAN Card Utility automatically adds trusted servers to the trust list and accepts auto-provisioning and AID (A-ID) group changes by default. The utility also enables you to import a Protected Access Credential (PAC). From the utility, you can also manually add or delete trusted servers, enable the manual acceptance or rejection of auto-

provisioning and A-ID group changes, or import or delete PACS, as described in the following instructions. In general, you should use the default settings. Therefore, check with the network administrator before you make any changes. To manually add a trusted server to the trust list 1. Open Broadcom Wireless Utility. 2. From the Wireless Networks tab, click Options, point to Cisco Compatible Extensions, and then click Administrator Settings. 3. Click Add. 4. Type the A-ID friendly name of the trusted server in the space provided, and then click OK. To delete a trusted server from the trust list file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (4 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide 1. Open Broadcom Wireless Utility. 2. From the Wireless Networks tab, click Options, point to Cisco Compatible Extensions, and then click Administrator Settings. 3. In the Trust list (A-ID), click the name of the trusted server you want to delete, and then click Delete. To change the default settings for administering Cisco Compatible Extensions 1. Open Broadcom Wireless Utility. 2. From the Wireless Networks tab, click Options, point to Cisco Compatible Extensions, and then click Administrator Settings. 3. Clear the Disable auto-provision prompt check box to enable manual acceptance or rejection. 4. Clear the Disable A-ID group change prompt check box to enable manual acceptance or 5. Select the Auto-provision PAC only once check box to auto-provision a Protected Access rejection. Credential (PAC) only once. To import or remove an EAP-FAST PAC 1. Open Broadcom Wireless Utility. 2. From the Wireless Networks tab, click Options, point to Cisco Compatible Extensions, and 3. To import a PAC: in Protected Access Credentials, click Add, and then follow the on-screen then click Manage PACs. instructions. NOTE: The PAC is password protected, so you must know the password to be able to import the PAC.

-or-

To remove a PAC: click anywhere in the row that lists the PAC, and then click Remove. Link Status Network status and signal and noise information about your network connection is displayed on the Link Status tab. NOTES:

l For IEEE 802.11n connections, speed is indicated by an MCS value. l Radio Stream information is provided only for IEEE 802.11n connections. l Click anywhere in the Signal & noise history box to change the type of history being displayed. Successive clicks change the type from both signal and noise, to noise only, to signal only, and back to both signal and noise. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (5 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide The status of your network connection is also indicated by the appearance of the utility icon number and color of the radio waves indicates the strength or weakness of the signal (see Table 1. Signal Strength Indicated by the Broadcom Wireless Utility Icon for details). The To view the network name (SSID), speed, signal strength rating, connection status, and the client IP address of the network connection, move your mouse pointer over the utility icon. NOTE: On computers running Windows XP, you also can view the SSID, speed, signal strength rating, and connection status by moving your mouse pointer over the Windows Wireless Network Connection icon in the notification area. Table 1. Signal Strength Indicated by the Broadcom Wireless Utility Icon file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (6 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Icon Appearance Indicated Received Signal Strength The signal strength is very good or excellent. The signal strength is weak. See Troubleshooting for suggested action. No signal is being received. See Troubleshooting for probable causes and suggested action. The radio is disabled or switched off. See Troubleshooting for suggested action. Statistics On the Statistics tab under Current, the following current statistics are shown:

l Network name (SSID) l Connection time l Packets sent l Packets received l Sent packets lost l Received packets lost l Total packets lost (%) Under Accumulated, the following accumulated statistics are shown:

l Packets sent l Packets received l Sent packets lost l Received packets lost file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (7 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Site Monitor Basic Site Monitor On the Site Monitor tab, the basic Site Monitor displays information about wireless routers/APs and ad hoc networks that are within range. To sort the list, click the column heading that shows the characteristic you want to sort by. For example, to sort by signal strength, click Signal . To view information about a particular wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, click anywhere in the row that lists the wireless router/AP or ad hoc network. The network information is shown under Selected Network. To view or change the network connection settings for a particular wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, right-click anywhere in the row that lists the wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, and then click Editif you have not yet created a network connection profile for that particular wireless router/AP or ad hoc network and want to do so, click Add . To see the information elements for a listed AP or ad hoc network, right-click anywhere in the row that lists the AP or ad hoc network, and then click Show Information Elements. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (8 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide NOTES:

l Nonbroadcasting networks are labeled (nonbroadcasting) under Network Name. l The network performance may be degraded while Site Monitor is displaying nonbroadcasting APs to which you are not currently connected. l The symbols under AP Band indicate IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, or IEEE 802.11n operation. To see more detailed information about a particular wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, click anywhere in the row that lists the wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, and then click Advanced. Advanced Site Monitor To save the activity log to a file, click the Options arrow, and then click Start Log. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (9 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide You can adjust the time interval between scans by clicking the Options arrow, and then clicking either one of the preset values or clicking Customize to specify a different time interval. NOTE: The network performance may be degraded while Site Monitor is displaying nonbroadcasting networks to which you are not currently connected. To view detailed network information for a single nonbroadcasting network, type the network name in the Look for box, and then click Find. To reset the site monitor to the broadcasting networks, click Clear. Diagnostics On the Diagnostics tab, you can run a number of tests to determine if your wireless network adapter is functioning properly. Select the tests you want to run, and then click Run. For information about an individual test, look under Information before you click Run. To see the test results, look under Information after you click Run. NOTE: The network connection is lost when you run the tests. When the test run is over, your network connection is automatically reestablished. Also, you can view a log of your wireless network events. To do so, click Log. Examples of wireless network events that are logged include:

file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (10 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide l Initiation of user session l Connecting to a network l Disconnecting from current network l Authentication mode being used l Driver status l Supplicant status l New wireless device available l Initializing wireless state machine l Wireless utility is managing this adapter l Wireless utility is not managing this adapter If your Broadcom 802.11 Network Adapter fails any of the diagnostics tests, go to http://www.broadcom. com/ for technical support. Information file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (11 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide The following information is displayed on the Information tab:

l Software details l Hardware details l Location details (shows the country for which the driver is installed and the channels supported for that location) Wireless Network Connection Settings The Wireless Network Connection Settings component is intended for use by advanced users or network administrators. You can use Wireless Network Connection Settings to create a connection profile for an advanced infrastructure network, a basic infrastructure network, or an ad hoc network (see " Connecting to an Advanced Network Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility"). Back to Contents Page file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (12 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom BT Utility: Quick Start Guide Step 1: Installing the Software NOTE: This installation is required before you insert the module into the USB port of your computer. 1. Insert the Bluetooth USB Module installation compact disc (CD) into the CD-ROM or DVD drive of your computer. 2. If the Main Menu screen appears automatically, select Install software and click OK. If the Main Menu screen does not appear automatically, click Start, click Run, type x:\setup.exe (where x is the CD-ROM or DVD drive letter of your computer), and click OK. 3. Click Next, click Finish, and then restart your computer. 4. Right-click the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar notification area (system tray) and click Start Using Bluetooth. Follow the instructions provided by the Initial Bluetooth Configuration Wizard. Step 2: Inserting the Module Make sure that the Bluetooth USB Module is properly inserted inside your computer. If you started at Step 1: Installing the Software The Found New Hardware Wizard detects and installs the device. When the installation is finished, you are ready to begin using the Bluetooth features of this computer. If you skipped Step 1: Installing the Software, you are ready to begin using the Bluetooth features of this computer. NOTE: Before you begin, however, please review the Bluetooth USB Module Users Guide. This document provides important information and instructions that will help you do the things you want to do with your Bluetooth enabled computer. Glossary Authentication A Bluetooth security feature that is used to verify identity; it requires a Bluetooth PIN Code from the remote device. Authorization A Yes-or-No Bluetooth security feature that requires operator intervention to avoid having the connection time out and fail. Bluetooth device Bluetooth enabled hardware such as a computer, printer, fax, mouse, keyboard, cell phone, headset, or PDA. Bluetooth PIN Code The alphanumeric string (up to 16 characters) that is typed to respond to a Bluetooth PIN Code Request. Also referred to as a Passkey. Bluetooth A short-range (9.14 meters/30 feet) networking protocol that allows enabled devices to automatically recognize each other. Bluetooth wireless technology allows quick and easy connectivity of Bluetooth enabled devices. Client Applications Software applications on this computer that allow this computer to use the Bluetooth services provided by remote Bluetooth devices. Link Key An internally generated unique security key (based on a Passkey, the Bluetooth Device Address, and an internally generated random number) that is exchanged by paired devices as proof of identity before a connection is established. Local Services Services that this computer provides to other Bluetooth devices. Paired Devices Bluetooth devices must be paired before they can connect. Paired devices share a unique Link Key, which they exchange each time they connect. Secure Connection A setting that requires a Passkey or Link Key each time you attempt to make a connection. All data exchanged over the Bluetooth connection is encrypted. Depending on other configuration options, authorization may also be required. Regulatory Statements for BCM94313HMGB USA-Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Canada Industry Canada (IC) This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RSS 102 RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This device has been designed to operate with the antennas listed below, and having a maximum gain of 3.9 dBi @ 2.4GHz. Antennas not included in this list or having a gain greater than 3.9 dBi @ 2.4GHz are strictly prohibited for use with this device. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms. EuropeEU Declaration of Conformity and Restrictions Hereby, Broadcom Corp, declares that this equipment complies with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. 0984 symbol and can be used throughout the This equipment is marked with the European community. This indicates compliance with the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC and meets the relevant parts of following technical specifications:

EN 300 328 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Wideband Transmission Systems; Data transmission equipment operating in the 2,4GHz ISM band and using spread spectrum modulation techniques; Harmonized EN covering essential requirements under article 3.2 of the R&TTE directive. EN 301 893 - Broadband Radio Access Networks (BRAN); 5 GHz high performance RLAN;

Harmonized EN covering essential requirements of article 3.2 of the R&TTE Directive EN 301 489-17 - Electromagnetic Compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM); Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 17 Specific Conditions for Wideband Data and HIPERLAN Equipment. EN 60950 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment. EN 62311 Assessment of electronic and electrical equipment related to human exposure restrictions for electromagnetic fields (0Hz - 300 GHz). Marking by the symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. France - 2.4GHz for Metropolitan France :

In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:

Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power (EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Taiwan DGT warning statement Appendix:

(ID):

CCXXxxLPyyyZz

,, CCXXxxLPyyyZz .

Lenovo IdeaPad U310/U410 User Guide V1.0 Read the safety notices and important tips in the included manuals before using your computer. Notes Before using the product, be sure to read Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide first. Some instructions in this guide may assume that you are using Windows 7. If you are using other Windows operating system, some operations may be slightly different. If you are using other operating systems, some operations may not apply to you. The features described in this guide are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer and/or your computer may include features that are not described in this user guide. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product. Regulatory Notice To refer to it, go to http://consumersupport.lenovo.com/ and click User guides and manuals. First Edition (March 2011) Copyright Lenovo 2011. LENOVO products, data, computer software, and services have been developed exclusively at private expense and are sold to governmental entities as commercial items as defined by 48 C.F.R. 2.101 with limited and restricted rights to use, reproduction and disclosure. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If products, data, computer software, or services are delivered pursuant a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Contents Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer...................................1 Top view..........................................1 Left-side view .................................4 Right-side view...............................5 Front view .......................................7 Bottom view ....................................8 Chapter 2. Learning the basics......................................10 First use..........................................10 Using AC adapter and battery ...12 Connecting external devices.......14 Securing your computer..............16 Switchable Graphics in two modes

(on select models).........................17 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet ....................................19 Wired connection......................... 19 Wireless connection..................... 21 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system.....................................23 OneKey Rescue system ............... 23 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting...26 Frequently asked questions........ 26 Troubleshooting........................... 28 Specifications.........................32 Trademarks.............................34 i Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Top view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

U310 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer

U410 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Note: The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product.

Attention:

Do NOT open the display panel beyond 130 degrees. When closing the display panel, be careful NOT to leave pens or any other objects in between the display panel and the keyboard. Otherwise, the display panel may be damaged. 2 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer a b c d e Use the camera for video communication. Integrated camera Wireless module antennas Computer display The LCD display with LED backlight provides brilliant The built-in antennas ensure optimal reception of wireless radio. visual output. Power button Press this button to turn on the computer. System status indicators For details, see System status indicators on page 18. f Touchpad The touchpad functions as a conventional mouse. Note: For details, see Using the touchpad on page 11. g Speakers The stereo speakers provide rich and powerful sound. 3 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Left-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

U310 1 2 3 4 5

U410 1 2 5 6 a OneKey Rescue system button Press this button to open OneKey Rescue system when the computer is powered off. Note: For details, see OneKey Rescue system on page 23. b Fan louvers Dissipate internal heat. Note: Make sure that none of the fan louvers are blocked or else overheating of the computer may occur. c RJ-45 port This port connects the computer to an Ethernet network. Note: For details, see Wired connection on page 19. d HDMI port Connects to devices with HDMI input such as a TV or a display. e USB 2.0 port Connect to USB devices. Note: For details, see Connecting USB devices on page 15. f Combo audio jack Connects to headphones or headsets. The combo audio jack does not support conventional microphones. 4 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Right-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

U310

U410 1 2 3 4 1 5 3 6 7 4 a b Built-in microphone The built-in microphone (with noise reduction) can be used for video conferencing, voice narration, or simple audio recordings. Combo audio jack Connects to headphones or headsets. The combo audio jack does not support conventional microphones. c USB 3.0 port Connects to USB devices. Note: For details, see Connecting USB devices on page 15. d AC power adapter jack Connect the AC adapter here. Note: For details, see Using AC adapter and battery on page 12. e Memory card slot Insert memory cards (not supplied) here. Note: For details, see Using memory cards (not supplied) on page 14. f HDMI port Connects to devices with HDMI input such as a TV or a display. 5 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer g RJ-45 port This port connects the computer to an Ethernet network. Note: For details, see Wired connection on page 19. 6 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Front view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

U310

U410 1 2 2 a Memory card slot Insert memory cards (not supplied) here. Note: For details, see Using memory cards (not supplied) on page 14. b System status indicators For details, see System status indicators on page 18. 7 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Bottom view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

U310 1 8 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer

U410 1 a Air inlet louvers Make outside air go inside the computer through the louvers. 9 Chapter 2. Learning the basics First use - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Reading the manuals Read the supplied manuals before using your computer.

Conncting to the power The supplied battery pack is not fully charged at purchase. To charge the battery and begin using your computer, insert the battery pack and connect the computer to an electrical outlet. The battery is automatically charged while the computer is running on AC power. Installing the battery pack Refer to the supplied Setup Poster to install the battery pack. Connecting the computer to an electrical outlet 1 Connect the power cord to the AC adapter. 2 Connect the AC adapter to the AC power adapter jack of the computer firmly. 3 Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet.

Turning on the computer Press the power button to turn on the computer.

Configuring the operating system You may need to configure the operating system when it is first used. The configuration process may include the procedures below. Accepting the end user license agreement Configuring the Internet connection Registering the operating system Creating a user account 10 Chapter 2. Learning the basics

Putting your computer into sleep state or shutting it down When you finish working with your computer, you can put it into sleep state or shut it down. Putting your computer into sleep state If you will be away from your computer for only a short time, put the computer into sleep state. When the computer is in sleep state, you can quickly wake it to resume use, and bypass the startup process. To put the computer into sleep state, do one of the following. Click Press Fn + F1. Note: Wait until the power indicator light starts blinking (indicating that the computer is in sleep state) before you move your computer. Moving your computer while the hard disk is spinning can damage the hard disk, causing loss of data. and select Sleep from the Start menu. To wake the computer, do one of the following. Press the power button. Press any key on the keyboard.

Shutting down your computer If you are not going to use your computer for a day or two, shut it down. To shut down your computer, click menu. and select Shut down from the Start 11 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using AC adapter and battery - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Checking battery status You can determine the percentage of battery power remaining by checking the battery icon in the notification area. Note: As each computer user has different habits and needs, it is difficult to predict how long a battery charge will last. There are two main factors:

The amount of energy stored in the battery when you commence work. The way you use your computer: for example, how often you access the hard disk drive and how bright you make the computer display.

Charging the battery When you find that the battery power is low, you need to charge the battery or replace it with a fully charged one. You need to charge the battery in any of the following situations:

When you purchase a new battery If the battery status indicator starts blinking If the battery has not been used for a long time Notes:

You are advised to insert the battery pack when using your computer to prevent small particles from entering the inside of your computer. To increase the life of the battery pack, the computer does not start recharging the battery immediately after it drops from fully charged. Charge the battery at a temperature between 50 F and 86 F (10 C-30 C). Full charge or discharge is not required. 12 Chapter 2. Learning the basics

Handling the battery If the rechargeable battery pack is replaced with an incorrect type, there may be danger of an explosion. The battery pack contains a small amount of harmful substances. To avoid possible injury and detriment to the environment, pay attention to the following points:

Replace only with a battery of the type recommended by Lenovo. Keep the battery pack away from fire. Do not expose the battery pack to water or rain. Do not attempt to disassemble the battery pack. Do not short-circuit the battery pack. Keep the battery pack away from children. Do not put the battery pack in trash that is disposed of in landfills. When disposing of the battery, comply with local ordinances or regulations and your companys safety standards. 13 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Connecting external devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Your computer has a wide range of built-in features and connection capabilities.

Using memory cards (not supplied) Your computer supports the following types of memory cards:

Secure Digital (SD) card MultiMediaCard (MMC) Notes:

This card reader does not support SDIO devices (e.g., SDIO Bluetooth, etc.). Insert ONLY one card in the slot at a time. Inserting a memory card 1 Push the dummy card until you hear a click. Gently pull the dummy card out of the memory card slot. Note: The dummy card is used for preventing dust and small particles from entering the inside of your computer when the memory card slot is not in use. Retain the dummy card for future use. 2 Slide the memory card in until it clicks into place. Removing a memory card 1 Push the memory card until you hear a click. 2 Gently pull the memory card out of the memory card slot. Note: Before removing the memory card, disable it via Windows safely remove hardware and eject media utility to avoid data corruption. 14 Chapter 2. Learning the basics

Connecting USB devices You can connect a USB device to your computer by inserting its USB plug

(Type A) into the USB port on your computer. The first time you plug a USB device into a particular USB port on your computer, Windows automatically installs a driver for that device. After the driver is installed, you can disconnect and reconnect the device without performing any additional steps. Note: Typically, Windows detects a new device after connecting it, and then installs the driver automatically. However, some devices may require you to install the driver before connecting. Check the documentation provided by the devices manufacturer before connecting the device. Before disconnecting a USB storage device, make sure your computer has finished transferring data by that device. Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area of Windows to remove the device before disconnecting. Note: If your USB device uses a power cord, connect the device to a power source before connecting it. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized. 15 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Securing your computer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

This section provides information about how to help protect your computer from theft and unauthorized use.

Attaching a security lock (not supplied) You can attach a security lock to your computer to help prevent it from being removed without your permission. For details on installing the security lock, please refer to the instructions shipped with the security lock that you have purchased. Refer to the Left-side view on page 4 for the location of the Kensington slot. Notes:

Before purchasing any security product, verify that it is compatible with this type of security keyhole. You are responsible for evaluating, selecting, and implementing the locking devices and security features. Lenovo offers no comment judgement or warranty regarding the function, quality or performance of locking devices and security features.

Using VeriFace VeriFace is a face recognition software which takes a digital snapshot, extracts key features of your face, and creates a digital map that becomes the systems password. If you want to activate VeriFace for the first time, click the VeriFace icon on the desktop to register your facial image. Notes:

The face registration and verification works best in an environment with steady and even light. You can determine whether to use this function when you log on the system. For more details on VeriFace, see the software help. 16 Chapter 2. Learning the basics

Using passwords Using passwords helps prevent your computer from being used by others. Once you set a password and enable it, a prompt appears on the screen each time you power on the computer. Enter your password at the prompt. The computer cannot be used unless you enter the correct password. Note: This password can be from one to seven alphanumeric characters in any combination. For details about how to set the password, see the Help to the right of the screen in BIOS setup utility. Note: To enter BIOS setup utility, press F2 when the Lenovo logo appears on the screen while the computer is starting up. Switchable Graphics in two modes

(on select models) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

The Lenovo G-series model supports Switchable Graphics in two modes:

Mode 1 Select the graphics processor based on application needs In this mode, the system allocates a graphics processor to some applications automatically. Alternatively, you can also manually select a graphics processor for your applications. The default setting of your computer is Mode 1. To switch to Mode 2, please refer to Switching between Mode 1 and Mode 2. Mode 2 Select the graphics processor manually or based on power source In this mode, you can select a graphics processor manually or based on the power source status (AC/DC):

High-performance GPU: It is also referred to as the independent GPU, which can provide higher graphics processing and display performance. Power-Saving GPU: It is also referred to as the integrated GPU, which can enable a longer running time of the battery. Switch between the two graphics processors as follows:

1 Start your computer under the Windows 7 operating system. 2 Click Start All Programs Catalyst Control Center, and run the CCC. 3 Click Power Switchable Graphics on the Catalyst Control Center setting page. 17 Chapter 2. Learning the basics 4 On the Switchable Graphics page, the currently active GPU is displayed under the current active graphics processing unit. You can click High-performance GPU or Power-Saving GPU under Choose a Graphics Processing Unit to switch the graphics processor. Switching between Mode 1 and Mode 2 Switch between the two modes as follows:

1 Start your computer under the Windows 7 operating system. 2 Click Start All Programs Catalyst Control Center, and run the CCC. 3 On the Catalyst Control Center setting page, click Power Switchable Graphics Method, choose Select the graphics processor manually or based on power source, and click Apply. 4 On the Switchable Graphics dialog box that appears, click Change to switch between the two modes. 5 On the contrary, you can switch back to Mode 1 from Mode 2. Note: It may take several seconds to switch between Mode 1 and Mode 2. Prior to switching between the two modes or manual switching between the two GPUs, it is recommended that you close any running applications. Under the Windows XP or Windows Vista operating system, none of the configurations supports switching between graphics processors, and they can work only under the mode of integrated GPU. 18 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet As a global network, the Internet connects computers worldwide, providing services such as e-mailing, information searching, electronic commerce, Web browsing and entertainment. You can connect the computer to the Internet in the following ways:

Wired connection: use physical wiring to connect. Wireless network technology: connect without wiring. Wired connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Wired connections are a reliable and safe way to connect the computer to the Internet. Cable Cable Internet services use a cable modem connected to the residential cable TV line. DSL is a family of related technologies that bring high-

speed network access to homes and small businesses over ordinary telephone lines. DSL 19 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet

Hardware connection:

Cable DSL TV cable Telephone line Splitter *

Splitter *

Cable modem *

DSL modem *

* Not supplied. Note: The above diagrams are for reference only. Actual connection method may vary.

Software configuration Consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) for details on how to configure your computer. 20 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet Wireless connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Wireless connections provide mobile access to the Internet, allowing you to stay online anywhere the wireless signal covers. Divided by the signal scales, wireless connection to the Internet can be built based on the following standards. Wi-Fi WiMAX Wi-Fi networks cover a small physical area, like a home, office, or small group of buildings. An access point is necessary for the connection. WiMAX networks connect several Wireless LAN systems to cover a metropolitan area, providing high-

speed broadband access without the need for cables. Note: Your computer may not support all wireless connection methods. 21 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet

Using Wi-Fi/WiMAX (on select models) Enabling wireless connection To enable wireless communications, do the following:

1 Slide the integrated wireless device switch from 2 Press Fn + F5 to make configuration. Hardware connection to

. Wi-Fi/WiMAX network Access point *

* Not supplied Software configuration Consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) and search Windows Help and Support Center for details on how to configure your computer. 22 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system OneKey Rescue system - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Introduction The Lenovo OneKey Rescue system is an easy-to-use application that can be used to back up the data on your system partition (C drive) for easy restore when required. You can run Lenovo OneKey Recovery under the Windows operating system, and the OneKey Rescue system without starting the Windows operating system. Attention:

In order to utilize the features of the OneKey Rescue system, your hard disk already includes a hidden partition by default to store the system image file and OneKey Rescue system program files. This default partition is hidden for security reasons and is the reason the available disk space is less than it claims. The exact available hard disk space depends on the file size of the mirror image file (based on the size of operating system and preinstalled software).

Using Lenovo OneKey Recovery (within Windows operating system) In Windows operating system, double click the OneKey Recovery system Icon on the desktop to launch Lenovo OneKey Recovery. Within the program, you can back up the system partition on the hard disk drive, other storage devices, or by creating recovery discs. Notes:

The backup process and creation of recovery discs may take some time, connect the AC adapter and battery pack to your computer. After the recovery discs are burned, please number them so that you can use them in the correct order. Computers without an integrated optical drive support the creation of recovery discs;

however an appropriate external optical drive is needed to physically create the recovery discs. For more instructions, see the Help file of Lenovo OneKey Recovery. 23 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system

Using Lenovo OneKey Rescue system (without Windows operating system) In the event that the operating system cannot be loaded, follow the steps below to access OneKey Rescue system. Shut down your computer. Press the key to launch OneKey Rescue system. Within the program, you can choose to restore your system partition to the original factory status, or to a previously generated backup. Note: The recovery process is irreversible. Make sure to back up any critical data before using the recovery feature.

Creating a recovery disc(s) Your computer does not ship with a recovery disc. You can use Lenovo OneKey Recovery system to create a recovery disc(s), which can be used to start and restore your computer in case of a system failure. To create a recovery disc(s):

Insert a recordable disc into the optical drive on your computer. Note: If your computer does not come with an integrated optical drive or if the integrated optical drive does not support disc creating, connect an appropriate external optical drive to your computer. In Windows, press the OneKey Rescue system button to launch Lenovo OneKey Recovery system. On the main screen, click Create Recovery Disc. Choose the type of recovery disc(s). You can create three types of recovery disc(s): recovery disc(s) with existing backup image, recovery disc(s) from the current system partition, and factory default recovery disc(s). Select the type of recovery disc you want to create and follow the on-screen instructions. Insert additional recordable disc(s) when prompted. 24 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system Notes:

The estimated number of discs needed will be displayed before the process of creating the recovery disc(s) begins. To minimize the number of discs needed, use recordable DVDs as the media. Also make sure your optical drive is compatible with the disc intended for use. After recovery disc creation, number the discs appropriately for use in their correct order. The first disc created will be used to start the computer in the case of a system failure. 25 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Frequently asked questions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

This section lists frequently asked questions and tells where you can find detailed answers. What safety precautions should I follow when using my computer?

See Chapter 1. Important safety information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. How can I prevent problems with my computer?

See Chapter 2. Use and care Information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. What are the main hardware features of my computer?

More information can be found in Chapter 1 and 2. Where can I find the detailed specifications for my computer?

See http://consumersupport.lenovo.com. I need to upgrade a device or I need to replace one of the following: the hard disk drive, memory, or the keyboard. See Appendix A. CRU instructions on page 35 of this guide. Where are the recovery discs?

Your computer did not come with a recovery disc. For an explanation of the alternative recovery methods offered by Lenovo, see Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system on page 23. Where are the installation discs for preinstalled programs?

Installation discs for preinstalled programs are not supplied with Windows preinstalled computers. You can visit the Lenovo consumer support Web site to find all preinstalled software downloads. By default, you can find some installation backups for certain preinstalled software in the APP folder under the D driver. How can I contact the customer support center?

See " Chapter 3. Getting help and service" of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. 26 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Where can I find warranty information?

For the warranty applicable to your computer, including the warranty period and type of warranty service, see the Lenovo limited warranty flyer that came with your computer. How can I install the device drivers?

A compatible device driver is a requirement to ensure correct operation and performance of each component in your computer. If your computer is pre-installed with an operating system, Lenovo provides all drivers that you need in your hard disk. What can I do if the backup process fails?

If you can start the backup feature without a problem, but it fails during the backup process, please try the following steps:

1 Close other programs, then restart the backup process. 2 Check if the destination media is damaged, try to select another path and then try again. When do I need to restore the system to the factory status?

You can use this feature when your system fails or you need to re-install your operating system. This will restore your computer back to the initial status when you first booted up your computer after receiving it from the store. If there is critical data on your current partition, back it up before you run this recovery feature. 27 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

If you do not find your problem here, see Chapter 2. The following section only describes problems that might negate the need to refer to the more comprehensive information in Chapter 2. Display problems When I turn on the computer, nothing appears on the screen. When I turn on the computer, only a white cursor appears on a blank screen. My screen goes blank while the computer is on. If the screen is blank, make sure that:

- The battery is installed correctly.

- The AC adapter is connected to the computer and the power cord is plugged into a working electrical outlet.

- The computer power is on. (Press the power button again for confirmation.)

- The memory is installed correctly. If these items are properly set, and the screen remains blank, have the computer serviced. Restore backed-up files to your Windows environment or the entire contents of your hard disk to the original factory contents using OneKey Rescue system. If you still see only the cursor on the screen, have the computer serviced. Your screen saver or power management may be enabled. Do one of the following to exit from the screen saver or to resume from sleep or hibernation mode:

- Touch the touchpad.

- Press any key on the keyboard.

- Press the power button.

- Press Fn + F2 to confirm whether the backlight for the LCD screen has been turned off. 28 Password problems I forgot my password. Chapter 5. Troubleshooting If you forget your user password, you must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the password changed. If you forget your HDD password, a Lenovo authorized servicer cannot reset your password or recover data from the hard disk. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the hard disk drive replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service. If you forget your supervisor password, a Lenovo authorized servicer cannot reset your password. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the system board replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service. Sleep or hibernation problems The critical low-battery error message appears, and the computer immediately turns off. The battery power is getting low. Connect the AC adapter to the computer, or replace the battery with a fully charged one. The computer enters sleep mode immediately after Power-

on self-test (POST). Make sure that:

- The battery is charged.

- The operating temperature is within the acceptable range. See Chapter 2. Use and care Information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. Note:If the battery is charged and the temperature is within range, have the computer serviced. The computer does not return from sleep mode and the com-

puter does not work. If the computer does not return from sleep mode, it may have entered hibernation mode automatically because the battery is depleted. Check the power indicator. If your computer is in sleep mode, connect the AC adapter to the computer, then press any key or the power button. If your computer is in hibernation mode or power-off state, connect the AC adapter to the computer, then press the power button to resume operation. Note: If the system still does not return from sleep mode, your system has stopped responding, and you cannot turn off the computer; reset the computer. Unsaved data may be lost. To reset the computer, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds or more. If the computer is still not reset, remove the AC adapter and the battery. 29 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Computer screen problems The screen is blank. Do the following:

- If you are using the AC adapter, or using the battery, and the battery status indicator is on, press Fn + to make the screen brighter.

- If the power indicator is in blinking, press the power button to resume from the sleep mode.

- If the problem persist, follow the solution in the following problem The screen is unreadable or distorted.

- Press Fn + F2 to confirm whether the LCD screen has been turned off. Make sure that:

- The display device driver is installed correctly.

- The screen resolution and color quality are correctly set.

- The monitor type is correct. The screen is unreadable or distorted. Incorrect characters appear on the screen. Did you install the operating system or programs correctly?

If they are installed and configured correctly, have the computer serviced. Sound problems No sound can be heard from the speaker even when the vol-

ume is turned up. Battery problems Your computer shuts down before the battery status indica-

tor shows empty.

-or-

Your computer operates after the battery status indicator shows empty. The computer does not operate with a fully charged battery. Make sure that:

- The Mute function is off.

- The headphone jack is not used.

- Speakers are selected as the playback device. Discharge and recharge the battery. The surge protector in the battery might be active. Turn off the computer for one minute to reset the protector; then turn on the computer again. A hard disk drive problem The hard disk drive does not work. In the Boot menu in BIOS setup utility, make sure that the hard disk drive is included in the Boot Device Priority correctly. 30 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting A startup problem The Microsoft Windows oper-

ating system does not start. Use the OneKey Rescue system to help solve or identify your problem. For details about OneKey Rescue system, see Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system on page 23. OneKey Rescue system problems Backup cannot be made. You are not currently using a Windows operating system. There is not enough space to store the backed up data. You will need to free more hard disk space on your system partition (C drive). Fail to restore system partition to factory default. The system partition, such as the partition size or the drive capacity of C, has been modified. Other problems Your computer does not respond. To turn off your computer, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds or more. If the computer still does not respond, remove the AC adapter and the battery. Your computer might lock when it enters sleep mode during a communication operation. Disable the sleep timer when you are working on the network. The computer does not start from a device you want. See the Boot menu of the BIOS setup utility. Make sure that the Boot Device Priority in the BIOS setup utility is set so that the computer starts from the device you want. The connected external device does not work. Also make sure that the device from which the computer starts is enabled. In the Boot menu in the BIOS setup utility, make sure that the device is included in the Boot Device Priority list. Press F12 when the Lenovo logo appears on the screen while the computer is starting up to select the device you want the computer starts from. Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than USB while the computer power is on; otherwise, you might damage your computer. When using a high power consumption external devices such as an external USB optical disk drive, use external device power adapter. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized, or system shut down may result. 31 Specifications Model Name: U310/U410 Note: The following specifications may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Machine Type: 20169, 3725 / 20170, 3726 Lenovo reserves the right to improve and/or change specifications at any time without notice. U310 U410 Appr. 333 mm 225 mm 18 mm Appr. 1.7 kg 13.3-inch Appr. 344 mm 235 mm 21 mm Appr. 1.8 kg 14.0-inch Form Factor Dimensions Weight LCD size Platform Platform Memory Type and speed Maximum supported capacity 4 GB Slots Hard disk drive Intel Panther point & HM77 DDR3-1333 or DDR3-1600 8 GB SODIMM 2 2.5-inch, 9.5 mm or 2.5-inch, 7.0 mm SATA II 16:9 (1,336 768 pixels) 2,048 1,536 pixels LED Form factor 2.5-inch, 7.0 mm Interface Display Display resolution (LCD) Maximum display resolution on external display device LCD backlight 32 Specifications I/O Ports USB Audio Communication Video/Audio Card reader Battery pack Type USB 2.0 1, USB 3.0 2 USB 2.0 2, USB 3.0 2 Combo audio jack 1 RJ-45 1 HDMI 1 2 in 1 slot 1 (MMC, SD) Li-Polymer Cells/Capacity 3 cell, 46 Wh 4 cell, 59 Wh AC adapter Input Output voltage Power Miscellaneous Camera 100 - 240 V, 50 - 60 Hz AC 20 V DC 40 W or 65 W 65 W or 90 W 0.3 or 1.0 mega pixels 33 Trademarks The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Lenovo OneKey VeriFace Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. AMD, the AMD Arrow logo, ATI, the ATI logo, AMD Athlon, AMD LIVEI, AMD Phenom, AMD Sempron, AMD Turion, AMD64, All-in-Wonder, Avivo, Catalyst, CrossFireX, FirePro, FireStream, HyperMemory, OverDrive, PowerPlay, PowerXpress, Radeon, Remote Wonder, Stream, SurroundView, Theater, TV Wonder, The Ultimate Visual Experience, and combinations thereof are trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. Premium Surround Sound technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. SRS Premium Surround Sound provides the ultimate audio experience for music, movies and games on the PC. Other company, products, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 34 IMPORTANT NOTE:

Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Radiation Exposure StatementThis EUT is compliance with SAR for general population/uncontrolled exposure limits in ANSI/IEEE C95.1-1999 and had been tested in accordance with the measurement methods and procedures specified in OET Bulletin 65 Supplement C. FCC Caution:

1. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules/Industry Canada RSS 210 standard . Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2. This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. 3. Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user authority to operate the equipment. Industry Canada Caution This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'IndustrieCanadaapplicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes :

(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et

(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. IC Radiation Exposure Statement:

This device complies with the exemption from the routine evaluation limits in Section 2.5 of RSS 102. Dclaration IC d'exposition aux radiations:

Cet appareil est conforme avec l'exemption des limites d'valuation courante dans la section 2.5 du RSS 102. L e n o v o C h n a i New World. New Thinking.TM www.lenovo.com 2 0 1 1 V1.0_en-US

Lenovo IdeaPad U510 User Guide V1.0 L e n o v o C h n a i New World. New Thinking.TM www.lenovo.com 2 0 1 2 V1.1_en-US Read the safety notices and important tips in the included manuals before using your computer. Note Before using the product, be sure to read Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide first. Some instructions in this guide may assume that you are using Windows 7. If you are using other Windows operating system, some operations may be slightly different. If you are using other operating systems, some operations may not apply to you. The features described in this guide are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer and/or your computer may include features that are not described in this user guide. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product. Regulatory Notice To refer to it, go to http://consumersupport.lenovo.com/ and click User guides and manuals. First Edition (July 2012) Copyright Lenovo 2012. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Contents Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer .......................................... 1 Top view.......................................................................................................................1 Left-side view ..............................................................................................................3 Right-side view............................................................................................................4 Front view ....................................................................................................................5 Bottom view .................................................................................................................6 Chapter 2. Learning the basics.............................................................. 7 First use.........................................................................................................................7 Using AC adapter and battery ..................................................................................9 Using the touchpad...................................................................................................10 Using the keyboard...................................................................................................11 Connecting external devices....................................................................................14 Special keys and buttons..........................................................................................17 System status indicators...........................................................................................18 Securing your computer...........................................................................................20 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet................................................. 21 Wired connection ......................................................................................................21 Wireless connection ..................................................................................................23 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system..................................................... 24 OneKey Rescue system ............................................................................................24 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting ................................................................. 27 Frequently asked questions .....................................................................................27 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................29 Trademarks............................................................................................ 34 i Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Top view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a b c d e f g Note: The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product.



Attention:

Do NOT open the display panel beyond 130 degrees. When closing the display panel, be careful NOT to leave pens or any other objects in between the display panel and the keyboard. Otherwise, the display panel may be damaged.

The parts bounded by dashed lines are internally installed. 1 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer a b c d e Integrated camera Computer display The LCD display with LED backlight provides brilliant Use the camera for video communication. Wireless module antennas visual output. The built-in antennas ensure optimal reception of wireless radio. Power button Press this button to turn on the computer. System status indicators For details, see System status indicators on page 18. f Touchpad The touchpad functions as a conventional mouse. Note: For details, see Using the touchpad on page 10. g Speakers The stereo speakers provide rich and powerful sound. 2 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Left-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a b c d e f g h a OneKey Rescue system button Press this button to start the OneKey Rescue system when the computer is powered off. Note: For details, see OneKey Rescue system on page 24. b Fan louvers Dissipate internal heat. Note: Make sure that none of the fan louvers are blocked or else overheating of the computer may occur. c RJ-45 port This port connects the computer to an Ethernet network. Note: For details, see Wired connection on page 21. Display port Connects to external display devices. HDMI port Connects to devices with HDMI input such as a TV or a display. d e f USB port Connect to USB devices. Note: For details, see Connecting USB devices on page 15. g Combo audio jack Connects to headphones or headsets. The combo audio jack does not support conventional microphones. Note: Recording may not be supported if third-party headphones or headsets are connected, due to different industry standards. h Built-in microphone The built-in microphone (with noise reduction) can be used for video conferencing, voice narration, or simple audio recordings. 3 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Right-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a b c d a USB port Connects to USB devices. Note: For details, see Connecting USB devices on page 15. b Memory card slot Insert memory cards (not supplied) here. Note: For details, see Using memory cards (not supplied) on page 14. c d Optical drive Reads/Burns optical disks. AC power adapter jack Connect the AC adapter here. Note: For details, see Using AC adapter and battery on page 9. 4 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Front view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a a System status indicators For details, see System status indicators on page 18. 5 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Bottom view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a a Louvers Allow air to enter the computer for cooling. 6 Chapter 2. Learning the basics First use - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Reading the manuals Read the supplied manuals before using your computer.

Conncting to the power The built-in battery pack is not fully charged at purchase. To charge the battery and begin using your computer, connect the computer to an electrical outlet. The battery is automatically charged while the computer is running on AC power. Connecting the computer to an electrical outlet 1 Connect the power cord to the AC adapter. 2 Connect the AC adapter to the AC power adapter jack of the computer firmly. 3 Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet.

Turning on the computer Press the power button to turn on the computer.

Configuring the operating system You may need to configure the operating system when it is first used. The configuration process may include the procedures below.

Accepting the end user license agreement

Configuring the Internet connection

Registering the operating system

Creating a user account 7 Chapter 2. Learning the basics

Putting your computer into sleep state or shutting it down When you finish working with your computer, you can put it into sleep state or shut it down. Putting your computer into sleep state If you will be away from your computer for only a short time, put the computer into sleep state. When the computer is in sleep state, you can quickly wake it to resume use, and bypass the startup process. To put the computer into sleep state, click menu. Note: Wait until the power indicator light starts blinking (indicating that the computer is and select Sleep from the Start in sleep state) before you move your computer. Moving your computer while the hard disk is spinning can damage the hard disk, causing loss of data. To wake the computer, do one of the following.

Press the power button.

Press any key on the keyboard.

Shutting down your computer If you are not going to use your computer for a day or two, shut it down. To shut down your computer, click menu. and select Shut down from the Start 8 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using AC adapter and battery - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Checking battery status You can determine the percentage of battery power remaining by checking the battery icon in the notification area. Note: As each computer user has different habits and needs, it is difficult to predict how long a battery charge will last. There are two main factors:

The amount of energy stored in the battery when you commence work.

The way you use your computer: for example, how often you access the hard disk drive and how bright you make the computer display.

Charging the battery If the battery power is low, you need to charge the battery. You need to charge the battery in any of the following situations:

If the battery status indicator starts blinking

If the battery has not been used for a long time Note:

To increase the life of the battery pack, the computer does not start recharging the battery immediately after it drops from fully charged.

Charge the battery at a temperature between 50 F and 86 F (10 C-30 C).

Full charge or discharge is not required.

Battery Protection If the battery pack remains idle for a long time, the battery may be over-discharged, and its degradation speed may be increased. The battery pack of IdeaPad U series uses the battery protection technology. When your computer remains idle for a long time, the battery pack enters the sleep mode to avoid over-discharge. After the battery pack enters the sleep mode, you cannot turn the computer on without using the power adapter. Please connect the power adapter to the computer to activate the battery pack. Note: The batter pack is in the sleep mode by default. When you use the computer for the first time, please plug the power adapter into it. Otherwise, the computer cannot be turned on. 9 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using the touchpad - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

d a a Touchpad b Left-click area c Right-click area b c To move the cursor on the screen, slide your fingertip over the pad in the direction in which you want the cursor to move. The function corresponds to that of the left mouse button on a conventional mouse, which can be implemented by clicking this area. The function corresponds to that of the right mouse button on a conventional mouse, which can be implemented by clicking this area. Note: You can enable/disable the touchpad by pressing d

. 10 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using the keyboard - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Your computer has function keys incorporated in its standard keyboard.

Function key combinations By pressing the appropriate function keys, you can change system settings instantly. To use this function, press and hold Fn

, then press one of the function keys a

. b a Fn + End:

Fn + PgUp:

Fn + PgDn:

The following describes the features of each function key. Fn + Home:

Activate the pause function. Activate the break function. Enable/Disable the scroll lock. Activate the insert function. b 11 Chapter 2. Learning the basics

Hotkeys Using hotkeys The hotkeys are located in the function key row of the keyboard. By pressing the appropriate hotkey, you can change system settings instantly. The following describes the function of each hotkey.

: Mute/Unmute.

: Increase sound volume.

: Refresh desktop or Web pages. Open the interface for integrated wireless devices settings (on/off).

:

: Decrease sound volume.

: Close active window or program.

: Enable/Disable the touchpad.

: Enable/Disable the built-in microphone.

: Turn on/off the integrated camera.

: Open the interface for changing display devices.

: Decrease display brightness.

: Increase display brightness. 12 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Setting hotkey mode By default, the hotkey functions are accessible by pressing the appropriate hotkey. However, you can disable the hotkey mode in the BIOS setup utility. To disable the hotkey mode:

1 Restart the computer. When the Lenovo logo appears, immediately press Fn + F2 to enter the BIOS setup utility. 2 In the BIOS setup utility, open the Configuration menu, and change the setting of HotKey Switch from Hotkey Mode to Legacy Mode. 3 Open the Exit menu, and select Exit Saving Changes. Note: When hotkey mode is disabled, press the Fn key and the appropriate hotkey to access the corresponding hotkey function. 13 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Connecting external devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Your computer has a wide range of built-in features and connection capabilities.

Using memory cards (not supplied) Your computer supports the following types of memory cards:

Secure Digital (SD) card

MultiMediaCard (MMC) Note:

This card reader does not support SDIO devices (e.g., SDIO Bluetooth, etc.). Insert ONLY one card in the slot at a time. Inserting a memory card 1 Push the dummy card until you hear a click. Gently pull the dummy card out of the memory card slot. Note: The dummy card is used for preventing dust and small particles from entering the inside of your computer when the memory card slot is not in use. Retain the dummy card for future use. 2 Slide the memory card in until it clicks into place. Removing a memory card 1 Push the memory card until you hear a click. 2 Gently pull the memory card out of the memory card slot. Note: Before removing the memory card, disable it via Windows safely remove hardware and eject media utility to avoid data corruption. 14 Chapter 2. Learning the basics

Connecting USB devices You can connect a USB device to your computer by inserting its USB plug

(Type A) into the USB port on your computer. The first time you plug a USB device into a particular USB port on your computer, Windows automatically installs a driver for that device. After the driver is installed, you can disconnect and reconnect the device without performing any additional steps. Note: Typically, Windows detects a new device after connecting it, and then installs the driver automatically. However, some devices may require you to install the driver before connecting. Check the documentation provided by the devices manufacturer before connecting the device. Before disconnecting a USB storage device, make sure your computer has finished transferring data by that device. Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the notification area of Windows to remove the device before disconnecting. Note: If your USB device uses a power cord, connect the device to a power source before connecting it. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized. 15 Chapter 2. Learning the basics

Connecting Bluetooth enabled device (on select models) If your computer has an integrated Bluetooth adapter card, it can connect to and transfer data wirelessly to other Bluetooth enabled devices, such as notebook computers, PDAs and cell phones. You can transfer data between these devices without cables and up to 10 meters range in open space. Note: The actual maximum range may vary due to interference and transmission barriers. To get the best possible connection speed, place the device as near your computer as possible. Enabling Bluetooth communications on your computer Press to make configuration. Note:

When you do not need to use the Bluetooth function, turn it off to save battery power.

You need to pair the Bluetooth enabled device with your computer before you can transfer data between them. Read the documentation supplied with the Bluetooth enabled device for details on how to pair the device with your computer. 16 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Special keys and buttons - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a

OneKey Rescue system button a

When the computer is powered off, press this button to start the OneKey Rescue system.

In the Windows operating system, press this button to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery system. Note: For details, see OneKey Rescue system on page 24. 17 Chapter 2. Learning the basics System status indicators - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

These indicators inform you of the computer status. a b a b Power status indicator Battery status indicator 18 No. Symbol Indicator a b Power Battery Chapter 2. Learning the basics Indicator status On (solid white) Blinking Off On (solid white) Solid amber Fast blinking amber Slow blinking amber Slow blinking white Off Meaning The computer is powered on. The computer is in sleep mode. The computer is powered off. The battery has more than 20% charge. The battery has between 5%

and 20% charge. The battery has less than 5%

charge. The battery is being charged. When battery charge reaches 20%, the blinking color changes to white. The battery has between 20%

and 80% charge and is still charging. When the battery reaches 80% charge the light will stop blinking, but charging will continue until the battery is fully charged. The battery is detached. 19 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Securing your computer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

This section provides information about how to help protect your computer from theft and unauthorized use.

Using passwords Using passwords helps prevent your computer from being used by others. Once you set a password and enable it, a prompt appears on the screen each time you power on the computer. Enter your password at the prompt. The computer cannot be used unless you enter the correct password. Note: This password can be from one to seven alphanumeric characters in any combination. For details about how to set the password, see the Help to the right of the screen in BIOS setup utility. Note: To enter BIOS setup utility, press Fn + F2 (when HotKey Switch is set to Hotkey Mode) or F2 (when HotKey Switch is set to Legacy Mode) when the Lenovo logo appears on the screen while the computer is starting up. 20 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet As a global network, the Internet connects computers worldwide, providing services such as e-mailing, information searching, electronic commerce, Web browsing and entertainment. You can connect the computer to the Internet in the following way:

Wired connection: use physical wiring to connect. Wireless network technology: connect without wiring. Wired connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Wired connections are a reliable and safe way to connect the computer to the Internet. Cable Cable Internet services use a cable modem connected to the residential cable TV line. DSL is a family of related technologies that bring high-

speed network access to homes and small businesses over ordinary telephone lines. DSL

Hardware connection Cable DSL TV cable Telephone line Splitter *

*

Splitter *

Cable modem *

DSL modem *

*

*

* Not supplied. Note: The above diagrams are for reference only. Actual connection method may vary.

*

21 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet

Software configuration Consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) for details on how to configure your computer. 22 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet Wireless connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Wireless connections provide mobile access to the Internet, allowing you to stay online anywhere the wireless signal covers. Divided by the signal scales, wireless connection to the Internet can be built based on the following standards. Wi-Fi WiMAX Wi-Fi networks cover a small physical area, like a home, office, or small group of buildings. An access point is necessary for the connection. WiMAX networks connect several Wireless LAN systems to cover a metropolitan area, providing high-

speed broadband access without the need for cables. Note: Your computer may not support all wireless connection methods.

Using Wi-Fi/WiMAX (on select models) Enabling wireless connection To enable wireless communications, do the following:

Press Hardware connection to make configuration. Wi-Fi/WiMAX network Access point *

* Not supplied Software configuration Consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) and search Windows Help and Support Center for details on how to configure your computer. 23 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system OneKey Rescue system - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Introduction The Lenovo OneKey Rescue system is an easy-to-use application that can be used to back up the data on your system partition (C drive) for easy restore when required. You can run Lenovo OneKey Recovery under the Windows operating system, and the OneKey Rescue system without starting the Windows operating system. Attention:



In order to utilize the features of the OneKey Rescue system, your hard disk already includes a hidden partition by default to store the system image file and OneKey Rescue system program files. This default partition is hidden for security reasons and is the reason the available disk space is less than it claims. The exact available hard disk space depends on the file size of the mirror image file (based on the size of operating system and preinstalled software).

Using Lenovo OneKey Recovery (within Windows operating system) In Windows operating system, double click the OneKey Recovery system Icon on the desktop to launch Lenovo OneKey Recovery. Within the program, you can back up the system partition on the hard disk drive, other storage devices, or by creating recovery discs. Note:

The backup process and creation of recovery discs may take some time, connect the AC adapter and battery pack to your computer.

After the recovery discs are burned, please number them so that you can use them in the correct order.

Computers without an integrated optical drive support the creation of recovery discs;

however an appropriate external optical drive is needed to physically create the recovery discs. For more instructions, see the Help file of Lenovo OneKey Recovery. 24 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system

Using Lenovo OneKey Rescue system (without Windows operating system) In the event that the operating system cannot be loaded, follow the steps below to access OneKey Rescue system.

Shut down your computer.

Press the key to launch OneKey Rescue system. Within the program, you can choose to restore your system partition to the original factory status, or to a previously generated backup. Note: The recovery process is irreversible. Make sure to back up any critical data before using the recovery feature.

Creating a recovery disc(s) Your computer does not ship with a recovery disc. You can use Lenovo OneKey Recovery system to create a recovery disc(s), which can be used to start and restore your computer in case of a system failure. To create a recovery disc(s):

Insert a recordable disc into the optical drive on your computer. Note: If your computer does not come with an integrated optical drive or if the integrated optical drive does not support disc creating, connect an appropriate external optical drive to your computer.

In Windows, press the OneKey Rescue system button to launch Lenovo OneKey Recovery system.

On the main screen, click Create Recovery Disc.

Choose the type of recovery disc(s). You can create three types of recovery disc(s): recovery disc(s) with existing backup image, recovery disc(s) from the current system partition, and factory default recovery disc(s). Select the type of recovery disc you want to create and follow the on-screen instructions. 25 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system

Insert additional recordable disc(s) when prompted. Note:

The estimated number of discs needed will be displayed before the process of creating the recovery disc(s) begins. To minimize the number of discs needed, use recordable DVDs as the media. Also make sure your optical drive is compatible with the disc intended for use.

After recovery disc creation, number the discs appropriately for use in their correct order. The first disc created will be used to start the computer in the case of a system failure. 26 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Frequently asked questions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

This section lists frequently asked questions and tells where you can find detailed answers. What safety precautions should I follow when using my computer?

See Chapter 1. Important safety information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. How can I prevent problems with my computer?

See Chapter 2. Use and care Information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. What are the main hardware features of my computer?

More information can be found in Chapter 1 and 2. Where can I find the detailed specifications for my computer?

See http://consumersupport.lenovo.com. Where are the recovery discs?

Your computer did not come with a recovery disc. For an explanation of the alternative recovery methods offered by Lenovo, see Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system on page 24. Where are the installation discs for pre-installed software?

Your computer does not come with installation discs for the pre-installed software. Installation programs for the pre-installed software on your computer can be downloaded from Lenovos consumer support Web site

(http://consumersupport.lenovo.com). If your computer is pre-installed with Windows operating system, you can also find installation programs for some pre-installed software in the Application folder on D partition of the hard disk drive. How can I contact the customer support center?

See Chapter 3. Getting help and service of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. 27 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Where can I find warranty information?

For the warranty applicable to your computer, including the warranty period and type of warranty service, see the Lenovo limited warranty flyer that came with your computer. Where can I find the device drivers?

A compatible device driver is a requirement to ensure correct operation and performance of each component in your computer. All the device drivers for your computer model can be downloaded from Lenovos consumer support Web site. If your computer is pre-installed with Windows operating system, you can also find device drivers for the operating system in the Driver folder on D partition of the hard disk drive. Lenovos consumer support Web site contains the most updated device drivers. What can I do if the backup process fails?

If you can start the backup feature without a problem, but it fails during the backup process, please try the following steps:

1 Close other programs, then restart the backup process. 2 Check if the destination media is damaged, try to select another path and then try again. When do I need to restore the system to the factory status?

You can use this feature when your system fails or you need to re-install your operating system. This will restore your computer back to the initial status when you first booted up your computer after receiving it from the store. If there is critical data on your current partition, back it up before you run this recovery feature. 28 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

If you do not find your problem here, see Chapter 2. The following section only describes problems that might negate the need to refer to the more comprehensive information in Chapter 2. Display problems When I turn on the computer, nothing appears on the screen. When I turn on the computer, only a white cursor appears on a blank screen. My screen goes blank while the computer is on.

If the screen is blank, make sure that:

- The AC adapter is connected to the computer and the power cord is plugged into a working electrical outlet.

- The computer power is on. (Press the power button again for confirmation.) If these items are properly set, and the screen remains blank, have the computer serviced.

Restore backed-up files to your Windows environment or the entire contents of your hard disk to the original factory contents using OneKey Rescue system. If you still see only the cursor on the screen, have the computer serviced.

Your screen saver or power management may be enabled. Do one of the following to exit from the screen saver or to resume from sleep or hibernation mode:

- Touch the touchpad.

- Press any key on the keyboard.

- Press the power button. 29 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Password problems I forgot my password.

If you forget your user password, you must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the password changed. If you forget your HDD password, a Lenovo authorized servicer cannot reset your password or recover data from the hard disk. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the hard disk drive replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service. If you forget your administrator password, a Lenovo authorized servicer cannot reset your password. You must take your computer to a Lenovo authorized servicer or a marketing representative to have the system board replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service. Sleep or hibernation problems The critical low-battery error message appears, and the computer immediately turns off. The computer enters sleep mode immediately after Power-on self-test (POST).

The battery power is getting low. Connect the AC adapter to the computer, or replace the battery with a fully charged one.

Make sure that:

- The battery is charged.

- The operating temperature is within the acceptable range. See Chapter 2. Use and care Information of Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. Note: If the battery is charged and the temperature is within range, have the computer serviced. 30 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting The computer does not return from sleep mode and the computer does not work.

If the computer does not return from sleep mode, it may have entered hibernation mode automatically because the battery is depleted. Check the power indicator. If your computer is in sleep mode, connect the AC adapter to the computer, then press any key or the power button. If your computer is in hibernation mode or power-off state, connect the AC adapter to the computer, then press the power button to resume operation. Note: If the system still does not return from sleep mode, your system has stopped responding, and you cannot turn off the computer; reset the computer. Unsaved data may be lost. To reset the computer, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds or more. If the computer is still not reset, remove the AC adapter. Computer screen problems The screen is blank.

Do the following:

- If you are using the AC adapter, or using the battery, and the battery status indicator is on, press to make the screen brighter.

- If the power indicator is in blinking, press the power button to resume from the sleep mode.

- If the problem persist, follow the solution in the following problem The screen is unreadable or distorted. The screen is unreadable or distorted.

Make sure that:

- The display device driver is installed correctly.

- The screen resolution and color quality are correctly set.

- The monitor type is correct. Incorrect characters appear on the screen.

Did you install the operating system or programs correctly? If they are installed and configured correctly, have the computer serviced. 31 Chapter 5. Troubleshooting Sound problems No sound can be heard from the speaker even when the volume is turned up. Battery problems Your computer shuts down before the battery status indicator shows empty.

-or-

Your computer operates after the battery status indi-

cator shows empty.

Make sure that:

- The Mute function is off.

- The headphone jack is not used.

- Speakers are selected as the playback device.

Discharge and recharge the battery. The computer does not operate with a fully charged battery.

The surge protector in the battery might be active. Turn off the computer for one minute to reset the protector; then turn on the computer again. A hard disk drive problem The hard disk drive does not work. A startup problem The Microsoft Windows operating system does not start.

In the Boot menu in BIOS setup utility, make sure that the hard disk drive is included in the Boot Priority Order correctly.

Use the OneKey Rescue system to help solve or identify your problem. For details about OneKey Rescue system, see Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system on page 24. 32 Other problems Your computer does not respond. The computer does not start from a device you want. The connected external device does not work. Chapter 5. Troubleshooting

To turn off your computer, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds or more. If the computer still does not respond, remove the AC adapter.

Your computer might lock when it enters sleep mode during a communication operation. Disable the sleep timer when you are working on the network.

See the Boot menu of the BIOS setup utility. Make sure that the Boot Priority Order in the BIOS setup utility is set so that the computer starts from the device you want.

Also make sure that the device from which the computer starts is enabled. In the Boot menu in the BIOS setup utility, make sure that the device is included in the Boot Priority Order list.

Press Fn + F12 (when HotKey Switch is set to Hotkey Mode) or F12 (when HotKey Switch is set to Legacy Mode) when the Lenovo logo appears on the screen while the computer is starting up to select the device you want the computer starts from.

Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than USB while the computer power is on; otherwise, you might damage your computer.

When using a high power consumption external devices such as an external USB optical disk drive, use external device power adapter. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized, or system shut down may result. 33 Trademarks The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Lenovo IdeaPad OneKey Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, products, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 34 Notes Before using the product, be sure to read Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide first. Some instructions in this guide may assume that you are using Windows 7. If you are using other Windows operating system, some operations may be slightly different. If you are using other operating systems, some operations may not apply to you. The features described in this guide are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer and/or your computer may include features that are not described in this user guide. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product. Regulatory Notice To refer to it, go to http://consumersupport.lenovo.com/ and click User guides and manuals. First Edition (March 2011) Copyright Lenovo 2011. LENOVO products, data, computer software, and services have been developed exclusively at private expense and are sold to governmental entities as commercial items as defined by 48 C.F.R. 2.101 with limited and restricted rights to use, reproduction and disclosure. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If products, data, computer software, or services are delivered pursuant a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Lenovo IdeaPad U310/U410 User Guide V1.0 L e n o v o C h n a i New World. New Thinking.TM www.lenovo.com 2 0 1 2 V1.1_en-US Read the safety notices and important tips in the included manuals before using your computer.

U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 1 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM P/N:147500930-1.1 Printed in China Lenovo limited warranty L505-0010-02 08/2011 This Lenovo Limited Warranty consists of the following parts:

Part 1 - General Terms Part 2 - Country-specific Terms Part 3 - Warranty Service Information The terms of Part 2 replace or modify terms of Part 1 as specified for a particular country. Part 1 - General Terms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

This Lenovo Limited Warranty applies only to Lenovo hardware products you purchased for your own use and not for resale. This Lenovo Limited Warranty is available in other languages at www.lenovo.com/warranty.

What this Warranty Covers Lenovo warrants that each Lenovo hardware product that you purchase is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use during the warranty period. The warranty period for the product starts on the original date of purchase as shown on your sales receipt or invoice or as may be otherwise specified by Lenovo. The warranty period and type of warranty service that apply to your product are as specified in Part 3 - Warranty Service Information below. This warranty only applies to products in the country or region of purchase. THIS WARRANTY IS YOUR EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY AND REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. AS SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN THAT EVENT, SUCH WARRANTIES APPLY ONLY TO THE EXTENT AND FOR SUCH DURATION AS REQUIRED BY LAW AND ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. AS SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY, THE ABOVE LIMITATION ON DURATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 1 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 2 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty

How to Obtain Warranty Service If the product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, you may obtain warranty service by contacting Lenovo or a Lenovo approved Service Provider. A list of approved Service Providers and their telephone numbers is available at: www.lenovo.com/support/phone. Warranty service may not be available in all locations and may differ from location to location. Charges may apply outside a Service Providers normal service area. Contact a local Service Provider for information specific to your location.

Customer Responsibilities for Warranty Service Before warranty service is provided, you must take the following steps:

follow the service request procedures specified by the Service Provider

backup or secure all programs and data contained in the product

provide the Service Provider with all system keys or passwords

provide the Service Provider with sufficient, free, and safe access to your facilities to perform service

remove all data, including confidential information, proprietary information and personal information, from the product or, if you are unable to remove any such information, modify the information to prevent its access by another party or so that it is not personal data under applicable law. The Service Provider shall not be responsible for the loss or disclosure of any data, including confidential information, proprietary information, or personal information, on a product returned or accessed for warranty service

remove all features, parts, options, alterations, and attachments not covered by the warranty

ensure that the product or part is free of any legal restrictions that prevent its replacement

if you are not the owner of a product or part, obtain authorization from the owner for the Service Provider to provide warranty service 2 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 3 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty

What Your Service Provider Will Do to Correct Problems When you contact a Service Provider, you must follow the specified problem determination and resolution procedures. The Service Provider will attempt to diagnose and resolve your problem by telephone, e-mail or remote assistance. The Service Provider may direct you to download and install designated software updates. Some problems may be resolved with a replacement part that you install yourself called a Customer Replaceable Unit or CRU. If so, the Service Provider will ship the CRU to you for you to install. If your problem cannot be resolved over the telephone; through the application of software updates or the installation of a CRU, the Service Provider will arrange for service under the type of warranty service designated for the product under Part 3 - Warranty Service Information below. If the Service Provider determines that it is unable to repair your product, the Service Provider will replace it with one that is at least functionally equivalent. If the Service Provider determines that it is unable to either repair or replace your product, your sole remedy under this Limited Warranty is to return the product to your place of purchase or to Lenovo for a refund of your purchase price.

Replacement Products and Parts When warranty service involves the replacement of a product or part, the replaced product or part becomes Lenovos property and the replacement product or part becomes your property. Only unaltered Lenovo products and parts are eligible for replacement. The replacement product or part provided by Lenovo may not be new, but it will be in good working order and at least functionally equivalent to the original product or part. The replacement product or part shall be warranted for the balance of the period remaining on the original product. 3 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 4 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty

Use of Personal Contact Information If you obtain service under this warranty, you authorize Lenovo to store, use and process information about your warranty service and your contact information, including name, phone numbers, address, and e-mail address. Lenovo may use this information to perform service under this warranty. We may contact you to inquire about your satisfaction with our warranty service or to notify you about any product recalls or safety issues. In accomplishing these purposes, you authorize Lenovo to transfer your information to any country where we do business and to provide it to entities acting on our behalf. We may also disclose it where required by law. Lenovos privacy policy is available at www.lenovo.com/.

What this Warranty Does not Cover This warranty does not cover the following:

uninterrupted or error-free operation of a product

loss of, or damage to, your data by a product

any software programs, whether provided with the product or installed subsequently

failure or damage resulting from misuse, abuse, accident, modification, unsuitable physical or operating environment, natural disasters, power surges, improper maintenance, or use not in accordance with product information materials

damage caused by a non-authorized service provider

failure of, or damage caused by, any third party products, including those that Lenovo may provide or integrate into the Lenovo product at your request

any technical or other support, such as assistance with how-to questions and those regarding product set-up and installation

products or parts with an altered identification label or from which the identification label has been removed 4 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 5 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty

Limitation of Liability Lenovo is responsible for loss or damage to your product only while it is in the Service Providers possession or in transit, if the Service Provider is responsible for the transportation. Neither Lenovo nor the Service Provider is responsible for loss or disclosure of any data, including confidential information, proprietary information, or personal information, contained in a product. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, AND NOTWITHSTANDING THE FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN, SHALL LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS, OR SERVICE PROVIDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING EVEN IF INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER THEORY OF LIABILITY:

1) THIRD PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; 2) LOSS, DAMAGE OR DISCLOSURE OF YOUR DATA; 3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS REVENUE, GOODWILL OR ANTICIPATED SAVINGS. IN NO CASE SHALL THE TOTAL LIABILITY OF LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATESS, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS OR SERVICE PROVIDERS FOR DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF ACTUAL DIRECT DAMAGES, NOT TO EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS DO NOT APPLY TO DAMAGES FOR BODILY INJURY (INCLUDING DEATH), DAMAGE TO REAL PROPERTY OR DAMAGE TO TANGIBLE PERSONAL PROPERTY FOR WHICH LENOVO IS LIABLE UNDER LAW. AS SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 5 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 6 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty

Your Other Rights THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS ACCORDING TO THE APPLICABLE LAWS OF YOUR STATE OR JURISDICTION. YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS UNDER A WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH LENOVO. NOTHING IN THIS WARRANTY AFFECTS STATUTORY RIGHTS, INCLUDING RIGHTS OF CONSUMERS UNDER LAWS OR REGULATIONS GOVERNING THE SALE OF CONSUMER GOODS THAT CANNOT BE WAIVED OR LIMITED BY CONTRACT. 6 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 7 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty Part 2 - Country-specific Terms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Australia Lenovo means Lenovo (Australia & New Zealand) Pty Limited ABN 70 112 394 411. Address: Level 10, North Tower, 1-5 Railway Street, Chatswood, NSW, 2067. Telephone: +61 2 8003 8200. Email: lensyd_au@lenovo.com The following replaces the same section in Part 1:

What this Warranty Covers:

Lenovo warrants that each hardware product that you purchase is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and conditions during the warranty period. If the product fails due to a covered defect during the warranty period, Lenovo will provide you a remedy under this Limited Warranty. The warranty period for the product starts on the original date of purchase specified on your sales receipt or invoice unless Lenovo informs you otherwise in writing. The warranty period and type of warranty service that apply to your product are set forth below in Part 3 - Warranty Service Information. THE BENEFITS GIVEN BY THIS WARRANTY ARE IN ADDITION TO YOUR RIGHTS AND REMEDIES AT LAW, INCLUDING THOSE UNDER THE AUSTRALIAN CONSUMER LAW. The following replaces the same section in Part 1:

7 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 8 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty

Replacement Products and Parts:

When warranty service involves the replacement of a product or part, the replaced product or part becomes Lenovos property and the replacement product or part becomes your property. Only unaltered Lenovo products and parts are eligible for replacement. The replacement product or part provided by Lenovo may not be new, but it will be in good working order and at least functionally equivalent to the original product or part. The replacement product or part shall be warranted for the balance of the period remaining on the original product. Products and parts presented for repair may be replaced by refurbished products or parts of the same type rather than being repaired. Refurbished parts may be used to repair the product; and repair of the product may result in loss of data, if the product is capable of retaining user-generated data. The following is added to the same section in Part 1:

Use of Personal Contact Information:

Lenovo will not be able to perform our service under this warranty if you refuse to provide your information or do not wish us to transfer your information to our agent or contractor. You have the right to access your personal contact information and request correction of any errors in it pursuant to the Privacy Act 1988 by contacting Lenovo. The following replaces the same section in Part 1:

Limitation of Liability:

Lenovo is responsible for loss or damage to your product only while it is in the Service Provider's possession or in transit, if the Service Provider is responsible for the transportation. Neither Lenovo nor the Service Provider is responsible for loss or disclosure of any data, including confidential information, proprietary information, or personal information, contained in a product. 8 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 9 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND NOTWITHSTANDING THE FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN, SHALL LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS, OR SERVICE PROVIDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING EVEN IF INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER THEORY OF LIABILITY: 1) THIRD PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; 2) LOSS, DAMAGE OR DISCLOSURE OF YOUR DATA; 3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS REVENUE, GOODWILL OR ANTICIPATED SAVINGS. IN NO CASE SHALL THE TOTAL LIABILITY OF LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATESS, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS OR SERVICE PROVIDERS FOR DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF ACTUAL DIRECT DAMAGES, NOT TO EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS DO NOT APPLY TO DAMAGES FOR BODILY INJURY (INCLUDING DEATH), DAMAGE TO REAL PROPERTY OR DAMAGE TO TANGIBLE PERSONAL PROPERTY FOR WHICH LENOVO IS LIABLE UNDER LAW. The following replaces the same section in Part 1:

Your Other Rights:

THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS AT LAW, INCLUDING UNDER THE AUSTRALIAN CONSUMER LAW. NOTHING IN THIS WARRANTY AFFECTS STATUTORY RIGHTS OR RIGHTS AT LAW, INCLUDING RIGHTS THAT CANNOT BE WAIVED OR LIMITED BY CONTRACT. For example, our products come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australian Consumer Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the products repaired or replaced if the products fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure. 9 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 10 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty New Zealand The following is added to the same section in Part 1:

Use of Personal Information:

Lenovo will not be able to perform our service under this warranty if you refuse to provide your information or do not wish us to transfer your information to our agent or contractor. You have the right to access your personal information and request correction of any errors in it pursuant to the Privacy Act 1993 by contacting Lenovo (Australia & New Zealand) Pty Limited ABN 70 112 394 411. Address: Level 10, North Tower, 1-5 Railway Street, Chatswood, NSW, 2067. Telephone: 61 2 8003 8200. Email: lensyd_au@lenovo.com Bangladesh, Cambodia, India, Indonesia, Nepal, Philippines, Vietnam and Sri Lanka The following is added to Part 1:

Dispute Resolution Disputes arising out of or in connection with this warranty shall be finally settled by arbitration held in Singapore. This warranty shall be governed, construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of Singapore, without regard to conflict of laws. If you acquired the product in India, disputes arising out of or in connection with this warranty shall be finally settled by arbitration held in Bangalore, India. Arbitration in Singapore shall be held in accordance with the Arbitration Rules of Singapore International Arbitration Center

(SIAC Rules) then in effect. Arbitration in India shall be held in accordance with the laws of India then in effect. The arbitration award shall be final and binding on the parties without appeal. Any award shall be in writing and set forth the findings of fact and the conclusions of law. All arbitration proceedings, including all documents presented in such proceedings shall be conducted in the English language. The English language version of this warranty prevails over any other language version in such proceedings. 10 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 11 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty

European Economic Area (EEA) The following is added to Part 1:

Customers in the EEA may contact Lenovo at the following address: EMEA Service Organisation, Lenovo (International) B.V., Floor 2, Einsteinova 21, 851 01, Bratislava, Slovakia. Service under this warranty for Lenovo hardware products purchased in EEA countries may be obtained in any EEA country in which the product has been announced and made available by Lenovo. Russia The following is added to Part 1:

Product Service Life The product service life is four (4) years from the original date of purchase. 11 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 12 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty Part 3 - Warranty Service Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Product or machine type Country or region of purchase Warranty period Types of warranty service 3, 4 1, 3, 4 Notebook:

20191, 4941 Taiwan, Korea Singapore China (Hong Kong S.A.R.), China

(Macau S.A.R.), India, Indonesia, Malaysia, Thailand, Philippines, Vietnam, Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar, Egypt, South Africa, Saudi Arabia, UAE, Algeria, Nigeria, Kenya, Sri Lanka Bosnia-Herzegovina, Croatia, Cyprus, Greece, Macedonia, Romania, Slovenia, Serbia Argentina, Colombia, Peru, Venezuela, Bolivia, Uruguay, Chile, Paraguay, Ecuador Austria, Belgium, France, Germany, Iceland, Israel, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Switzerland, the United Kingdom Japan, Australia, New Zealand United States of America, Canada Russia, Ukraine, the Republic of Kazakhstan, Belarus, Turkmenistan, Azerbaijan, Georgia Brazil Mexico Denmark, Estonia, Finland, Norway, Spain, Sweden Poland, Turkey, Czech Republic, Hungary, Slovakia, Bulgaria 1, 4 1, 3 4 1, 5 4 1, 4 parts and labor -

1 year battery pack -

1 year parts and labor -

2 years battery pack -

1 year If required, the Service Provider will provide repair or exchange service depending on the type of warranty service specified for your product and the available service. Scheduling of service will depend upon the time of your call, parts availability, and other factors. 12 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 13 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty

Types of Warranty Service 1 Customer Replaceable Unit (CRU) Service Under CRU Service, the Service Provider will ship CRUs to you at its cost for installation by you. CRU information and replacement instructions are shipped with your product and are available from Lenovo at any time upon request. CRUs that are easily installed by you are called Self-service CRUs. Optional-service CRUs are CRUs that may require some technical skill and tools. Installation of Self-service CRUs is your responsibility. You may request that a Service Provider install Optional-service CRUs under one of the other types of warranty service designated for your product. An optional service offering may be available for purchase from a Service Provider or Lenovo under which Self-service CRUs would be installed for you. You may find a list of CRUs and their designation in the publication that was shipped with your product or at www.lenovo.com/CRUs. The requirement to return a defective CRU, if any, will be specified in the instructions shipped with a replacement CRU. When return is required: 1) return instructions, a prepaid return shipping label, and a container will be included with the replacement CRU; and 2) you may be charged for the replacement CRU if the Service Provider does not receive the defective CRU from you within thirty (30) days of your receipt of the replacement CRU. 2 On-site Service Under On-Site Service, a Service Provider will either repair or exchange the product at your location. You must provide a suitable working area to allow disassembly and reassembly of the product. Some repairs may need to be completed at a service center. If so, the Service Provider will send the product to the service center at its expense. 3 Courier or Depot Service Under Courier or Depot Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged at a designated service center, with shipping at the expense of the Service Provider. You are responsible for disconnecting the product and packing it in a shipping container provided to you to return your product to a designated service center. A courier will pick up your product and deliver it to the designated service center. The service center will return the product to you at its expense. 13 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 14 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Lenovo limited warranty 4 Customer Carry-In Service Under Customer Carry-In Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged after you deliver it to a designated service center at your risk and expense. After the product has been repaired or exchanged, it will be made available to you for collection. If you fail to collect the product, the Service Provider may dispose of the product as it sees fit, with no liability to you. 5 Mail-In Service Under Mail-In Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged at a designated service center after you deliver it at your risk and expense. After the product has been repaired or exchanged, it will be returned to you at Lenovos risk and expense, unless the Service Provider specifies otherwise. 6 Customer Two-Way Mail-In Service Under Customer Two-Way Mail-In Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged after you deliver it to a designated service center at your risk and expense. After the product has been repaired or exchanged, it will be made available to you for return shipping at your risk and expense. If you fail to arrange return shipment, the Service Provider may dispose of the product as it sees fit, with no liability to you. 7 Product Exchange Service Under Product Exchange Service, Lenovo will ship a replacement product to your location. You are responsible for its installation and verification of its operation. The replacement product becomes your property in exchange for the failed product, which becomes the property of Lenovo. You must pack the failed product in the shipping carton in which you received the replacement product and return it to Lenovo. Transportation charges, both ways, shall be at Lenovos expense. If you fail to use the carton in which the replacement product was received, you may be responsible for any damage to the failed product occurring during shipment. You may be charged for the replacement product if Lenovo does not receive the failed product within thirty (30) days of your receipt of the replacement product. 14 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 15 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Product specific Notices The notices in this appendix are specific to the products with the given MT numbers. Notices that are common for most Lenovo products are included in Appendix A. Notices of the Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. Energy star information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy aimed at saving money and protecting the environment through energy efficient products and practices. Lenovo is proud to offer our customers products with an ENERGY STAR compliant designation. Lenovo computers of the following machine types, if the ENERGY STAR mark is affixed, have been designed and tested to conform to the ENERGY STAR program requirements for computers.

20191, 4941 By using ENERGY STAR compliant products and taking advantage of the power-management features of your computer, you reduce the consumption of electricity. Reduced electrical consumption contributes to potential financial savings, a cleaner environment, and the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions. For more information about ENERGY STAR, visit http://www.energystar.gov. Lenovo encourages you to make efficient use of energy an integral part of your day-to-day operations. To help in this endeavor, Lenovo has preset the following power-management features to take effect when your computer has been inactive for a specified duration:

15 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 16 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Product specific Notices Table 1. ENERGY STAR power-management features Windows 7 Power plan: Energy Star

Turn off the display:

After 10 minutes

Put the computer to sleep:

After 25 minutes

Advanced power settings:

- Turn off hard disks:

After 20 minutes

- Hibernate: After 1 hour To awaken your computer from a Sleep mode, press any key on your keyboard. For more information about these settings, refer to your Windows Help and Support information system. 16 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 17 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Product specific Notices Electronic emissions notices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

The following information refers to Lenovo IdeaPad U310/U410, machine type 20191, 4941.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee the interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits. Proper cables and connectors are available from Lenovo authorized dealers. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 17 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 18 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Product specific Notices Responsible party:

Lenovo (United States) Incorporated 1009 Think Place - Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 U.S.A. Telephone: (919) 294-5900

Industry Canada Class B Emission Compliance Statement This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Avis de conformit la rglementation dIndustrie Canada Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

German Class B Compliance Statement Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:

Hinweis fr Gerte der Klasse B EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen Vertrglichkeit Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/

108/EG (frher 89/336/EWG) zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hlt die Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse B ein. Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Gerte wie in den Handbchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren drfen auch nur von der Lenovo empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. Lenovo bernimmt keine Verantwortung fr die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der Lenovo verndert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne Empfehlung der Lenovo gesteckt/eingebaut werden. 18 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 19 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Product specific Notices Deutschland:

Einhaltung des Gesetzes ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmittein Dieses Produkt entspricht dem Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln EMVG (frher Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten). Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (frher 89/336/EWG) in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland. Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln, EMVG vom 20. Juli 2007 (frher Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten), bzw. der EMV EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EC (frher 89/336/EWG), fr Gerte der Klasse B. Dieses Gert ist berechtigt, in bereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformittszeichen - CE - zu fhren. Verantwortlich fr die Konformittserklrung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo

(Deutschland) GmbH, Gropiusplatz 10, D-70563 Stuttgart. Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraf 4 Abs. (1) 4:

Das Gert erfllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse B.

European Union Compliance Statement Class B Compliance European Union - Compliance to the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2004/108/EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-

recommended modification of the product, including the installation of option cards from other manufacturers. 19 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 20 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Product specific Notices This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B Information Technology Equipment according to European Standard EN 55022. The limits for Class B equipment were derived for typical residential environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication devices. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to reduce the potential for causing interference to radio and TV communications and to other electrical or electronic equipment. Such cables and connectors are available from Lenovo authorized dealers. Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors. 20 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 21 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Specifications Model Name: Lenovo IdeaPad U510 Machine Type: 20191, 4941 Note: The following specifications may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Lenovo reserves the right to improve and/or change specifications at any time without notice. Form Factor Dimensions Weight LCD size Processor Memory Type and speed Maximum supported capacity Slots Hard disk drive Form factor Interface Display Display resolution (LCD) Maximum display resolution on external display device LCD backlight Appr. 382 mm 250 mm 21 mm Appr. 2.2 kg 15.6-inch See the system properties of your computer. You can do this as follows:

Click Start, right-click Computer;

then from the pull down menu select Properties. DDR3-1333 or DDR3-1600 8 GB SODIMM 2 2.5-inch, 9.5 mm or 2.5-inch, 7.0 mm SATA 16:9 (1,366 768 pixels) 2,048 1,536 pixels LED 21 Appendix UG x-D.fm Page 22 Friday, May 18, 2012 6:00 PM Specifications I/O Ports USB Audio Communication Video/Audio Memory card slot Battery pack Type Cells/Capacity AC adapter Input Output voltage Power Miscellaneous Camera Combo audio jack 1 RJ-45 1 HDMI 1 2 in 1 slot 1 (MMC, SD) Li-Polymer 45Wh, 3cell/6cell 4060mah 90 - 264 V, 50 - 60 Hz AC 20 V DC 65 W 0.3 or 1.0 mega pixels 22 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 23 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM Trademarks Lenovo, the Lenovo logo, IdeaPad are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, products, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 23 U510 Lenovo Limited Warrangy flyer_en.book Page 24 Friday, May 18, 2012 5:16 PM